Panasonic AJ HDX900E User Manual
Operating Instructions  
Camera-Recorder  
P
E
Model No. AJ-  
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.  
ENGLISH  
@
F0706W1106 -F  
Printed in Japan  
VQT0X86-1  
Read this first! (For AJ-HDX900E)  
DO NOT REMOVE PANEL COVERS BY  
UNSCREWING THEM.  
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove the  
covers. No user serviceable parts inside.  
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.  
$
WARNING:  
OTO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO  
RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
OTO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD, KEEP THIS EQUIPMENT AWAY FROM  
CAUTION:  
ALL LIQUIDS.  
USE AND STORE ONLY IN  
LOCATIONS WHICH ARE NOT EXPOSED TO THE  
RISK OF DRIPPING OR SPLASHING LIQUIDS,  
AND DO NOT PLACE ANY LIQUID CONTAINERS  
ON TOP OF THE EQUIPMENT.  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE,  
USE THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES  
ONLY.  
indicates safety information.  
Caution regarding laser beams  
The CCD may be damaged if it is subjected to light from a laser beam.  
When using the camera-recorder in locations where laser irradiation equipment is used, be careful not to allow  
the laser beam to shine directly on the lens.  
3
Read this first! (For AJ-HDX900E)  
Attention/Attentie  
Batteries are used for the main power source and memory back-up in the product.  
At the end of their useful life, you should not throw them away.  
Instead, hand them in as small chemical waste.  
Voor de primaire voeding en het reservegeheugen van het apparaat wordt gebruikgemaakt van een  
batterij.  
O
O
Wanneer de batterij is uitgeput, mag u deze niet gewoon weggooien, maar dient u deze als klein  
chemisch afval weg te doen.  
To remove the battery/Verwijderen van de batterij  
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd Battery)  
Batterij Voor Primaire Voeding (Nikkelcadmiumbatterij)  
Anton/Bauer Battery  
Anton/Bauer-Batterij  
If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used,  
check the Operating Instructions accompanying the  
battery.  
O
O
In geval u een batterij van een anden fabrikant zou  
gebruiken,  
gelieve  
dan  
eerst  
zorgvuldig  
de  
gebruiksaanwijzing van deze batterij te lezen.  
Unlock  
Ontgrendelingshefboom  
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)  
Batterij Voor Reservegeheugen (Lithiumbatterij)  
For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end  
of its service life, please consult your dealer.  
Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de  
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat bij einde  
levensduur afdankt.  
O
O
4
Contents  
4-5 Setting the time data ................................... 38  
4-5-1 Setting the user bits ........................................ 38  
4-5-2 Setting the internal clock’s date and time ........ 42  
4-5-3 Setting the time code ...................................... 43  
4-5-4 Externally locking the time code ...................... 43  
4-5-5 Setting the UMID information .......................... 47  
Chapter 1 General ..................................... 7  
1-1 Features of the camera unit ......................... 7  
1-2 Features of the VTR unit .............................. 8  
1-3 Features of the Input/Output unit ................ 8  
1-4 Other featuresa ............................................. 9  
1-5 Dimensions drawing ..................................... 9  
1-6 System configuration ................................. 10  
4-6 Menu displays on the viewfinder screen... 48  
4-6-1 Menu configuration .......................................... 48  
4-6-2 Basic menu operations .................................... 48  
4-6-3 Selecting the user menus ................................ 49  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions ...... 11  
4-7 Viewfinder screen status displays ............ 50  
4-7-1 Viewfinder lamp displays.................................. 50  
4-7-2 Viewfinder screen status display  
2-1 Power supply and accessory mounting  
section ......................................................... 11  
2-2 Audio function section ............................... 12  
2-3 Shooting and recording/playback function  
section ......................................................... 14  
2-4 Menu operation section .............................. 17  
2-5 Time code related section .......................... 18  
2-6 Warning/status display section ................. 19  
2-7 Display window and its displays ............... 19  
2-8 Viewfinder section ...................................... 21  
configuration..................................................... 50  
4-7-3 Selecting the viewfinder screen display  
items ................................................................ 50  
4-7-4 Display modes and setting changes/adjustment  
result messages .............................................. 56  
4-7-5 Setting the marker displays ............................. 56  
4-7-6 Setting the camera ID ..................................... 56  
4-7-7 Mode check screen displays  
(MODE CHECK button function) ..................... 57  
4-7-8 Marker check screen displays  
(MARKER SELECT button function) ............... 57  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback ....... 22  
4-8 Selection of video output signals .............. 58  
4-8-1 Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT  
connector ......................................................... 58  
4-8-2 Settings of signals output from MON OUT  
connector ........................................................ 60  
3-1 Cassette tapes ............................................. 22  
3-2 Basic procedures ........................................ 23  
3-3 Scene-to-scene continuity ......................... 25  
3-4 To record video signals of a few seconds  
before starting recording  
4-9 Menu-driven function setup ....................... 61  
4-9-1 Setting the USER SW GAIN switching ............ 61  
4-9-2 Selecting the F.AUDIO LEVEL  
control function ................................................ 61  
4-9-3 Allocating functions to the USER MAIN, USER1  
and USER2 buttons ........................................ 62  
4-9-4 Setting the color temperature manually .......... 63  
(PRE-RECORDING function)....................... 26  
3-5 Recording in intervals  
(INTERVAL REC function)........................... 27  
3-6 To take the previous cut again  
(RETAKE function) ...................................... 29  
3-7 To check the last few seconds of the  
recording (Rec-review function) ................ 29  
3-8 Normal playback and playback at different  
speeds .......................................................... 29  
4-10 Set data handling ........................................ 64  
4-10-1 Handling the setup card .................................. 65  
4-10-2 Setup card operations ..................................... 65  
4-10-3 How to use the user data ................................ 69  
4-10-4 How to use the scene file data ........................ 70  
4-10-5 Method for returning to user settings .............. 73  
4-10-6 Method for returning to the factory settings ..... 73  
4-10-7 Lens file ........................................................... 74  
4-10-8 How to provide lens files ................................. 74  
4-10-9 To save the lens file into the built-in memory .... 75  
4-10-10 To read the lens file from the built-in memory .... 77  
4-10-11 To write in and read out the lens file to/from the  
SD memory card ............................................. 78  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for  
recording ................................ 30  
4-1 Multi Format ................................................ 30  
4-1-1 Video system and Recording format ............... 30  
4-1-2 Recording format on tapes and signal format at  
output connector ............................................. 31  
4-2 Adjusting the white balance and  
black balance .............................................. 32  
4-2-1 Adjusting the white balance ............................ 32  
4-2-2 Adjusting the black balance ............................ 34  
Chapter 5 Preparation ............................. 80  
5-1 Supplying the power ................................... 80  
5-1-1 Attaching the battery and setting the  
4-3 Setting the electronic shutter .................... 35  
4-3-1 Shutter modes ................................................. 35  
4-3-2 Setting the shutter mode and speed ............... 36  
4-3-3 Setting the synchro scan mode ....................... 36  
battery type ..................................................... 80  
5-1-2 Use of the external DC power supply .............. 82  
5-2 Attaching the lens and adjusting the flange  
back .............................................................. 83  
5-3 Adjusting the white shading of the lens ... 84  
4-4 Selecting the audio input signals and  
adjusting their recording levels ................. 37  
4-4-1 Selecting the audio input signals ..................... 37  
4-4-2 Adjusting the audio signal recording levels ..... 37  
4-4-3 CH3 and CH4 recording levels ........................ 38  
5
Contents (continued)  
5-4 Audio input signal preparations ................ 86  
5-4-1 When using the front microphone ................... 86  
5-4-2 When using a wireless receiver ...................... 86  
5-4-3 When using an audio component .................... 87  
7-4 VF ............................................................... 115  
7-4-1 VF DISPLAYS ............................................... 115  
7-4-2 VF MARKER ................................................. 116  
7-4-3 VF USER BOX .............................................. 116  
7-4-4 VF INDICATOR1 ........................................... 117  
7-4-5 VF INDICATOR2 ........................................... 117  
7-4-6 MODE CHECK IND ....................................... 118  
7-4-7 !LED .............................................................. 118  
5-5 Mounting the unit on a tripod .................... 87  
5-6 Attaching the shoulder belt ....................... 88  
5-7 Adjusting the position of the  
shoulder pad ............................................... 88  
5-8 Attaching the rain cover ............................. 88  
5-9 Attacching the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL  
control knob ................................................ 88  
5-10 Connection of the remote control unit  
(AJ-RC10G) .................................................. 89  
5-11 Connection of the external switch ............ 89  
7-5 OPERATION ............................................... 119  
7-5-1 CAMERA ID .................................................. 119  
7-5-2 SHUTTER SPEED ........................................ 119  
7-5-3 SHUTTER SELECT ...................................... 119  
7-5-4 USER SW ..................................................... 120  
7-5-5 SW MODE ..................................................... 121  
7-5-6 WHITE BALANCE MODE ............................. 121  
7-5-7 USER SW GAIN ............................................ 122  
7-5-8 LENS/IRIS ..................................................... 122  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and  
7-6 FILE ............................................................ 123  
7-6-1 CARD READ/WRITE .................................... 123  
7-6-2 CARD R/W SELECT ..................................... 123  
7-6-3 LENS FILE .................................................... 123  
7-6-4 LENS FILE CARD R/W ................................. 123  
7-6-5 SCENE .......................................................... 123  
7-6-6 INITIALIZE .................................................... 124  
inspections ............................. 90  
6-1 Inspections prior to shooting .................... 90  
6-1-1 Preparation for inspections ............................. 90  
6-1-2 Inspecting the camera unit .............................. 90  
6-1-3 Inspecting the VTR unit ................................... 91  
6-1-4 Self-diagnosis function .................................... 92  
6-2 Maintenance ................................................ 93  
6-2-1 Condensation................................................... 93  
6-2-2 Head cleaning .................................................. 93  
6-2-3 Cleaning inside the viewfinder ........................ 93  
6-2-4 Phenomena inherent to CCD cameras ........... 93  
6-2-5 Replacing the backup battery .......................... 93  
6-2-6 Connectors and signals ................................... 94  
7-7 MAINTENANCE ......................................... 124  
7-7-1 SYSTEM CHECK .......................................... 124  
7-7-2 DIAGNOSTIC ................................................ 124  
7-7-3 LENS ADJ ..................................................... 124  
7-7-4 BLACK SHADING ......................................... 125  
7-7-5 WHITE SHADING ......................................... 125  
7-7-6 LENS FILE ADJ ............................................ 125  
6-3 Warning system .......................................... 98  
6-3-1 Warning description tables .............................. 98  
6-3-2 Error codes .................................................... 100  
6-3-3 Emergency eject ........................................... 100  
7-8 VTR MENU ................................................. 126  
7-8-1 VTR FUNCTION ........................................... 126  
7-8-2 BATTERY/TAPE ........................................... 126  
7-8-3 BATTERY SETTING1 ................................... 127  
7-8-4 BATTERY SETTING2 ................................... 128  
7-8-5 MIC/AUDIO1 ................................................. 129  
7-8-6 MIC/AUDIO2 ................................................. 129  
7-8-7 TC/UB ........................................................... 130  
7-8-8 UMID SET/INFO ........................................... 131  
7-8-9 VTR DIAG ..................................................... 131  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables ...... 101  
7-1 Menu configfation ..................................... 101  
7-2 SYSTEM SETTING ..................................... 102  
7-2-1 SYSTEM MODE ............................................ 102  
7-2-2 REC FUNCTION ........................................... 102  
7-2-3 OUTPUT SEL ................................................ 103  
7-2-4 VIDEO OUT SETTING .................................. 103  
7-2-5 MONITOR OUT SETTING ............................ 104  
7-2-6 RC OUT SETTING ........................................ 104  
7-2-7 DOWNCON SETTING .................................. 105  
7-2-8 GENLOCK ..................................................... 105  
7-2-9 OPTION MODE ............................................. 106  
7-9 OPTION MENU............................................ 131  
7-9-1 OPTION ........................................................ 131  
Chapter 8 Specifications ...................... 132  
7-3 PAINT ......................................................... 107  
7-3-1 RB GAIN CONTROL ..................................... 107  
7-3-2 RGB BLACK CONTROL ............................... 107  
7-3-3 MATRIX ......................................................... 108  
7-3-4 COLOR CORRECTION ................................ 108  
7-3-5 LOW SETTING ............................................. 109  
7-3-6 MID SETTING ............................................... 110  
7-3-7 HIGH SETTING ............................................. 110  
7-3-8 ADDTIONAL DTL .......................................... 111  
7-3-9 SKIN TONE DTL ........................................... 112  
7-3-10 KNEE/LEVEL ................................................ 113  
7-3-11 GAMMA ......................................................... 113  
7-3-12 CAMERA SETTING ...................................... 114  
OUniSlot is a trademark of Ikegami Tsusinki co., Ltd.  
O“DOLBY” and the double-D symbol Î are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
OOther names of companies and products are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective  
companies.  
6
Notes  
OThe unit’s internal clock is not set to the correct date and time when shipped from the factory.  
Before using the unit, set the date and time. (Refer to page 42)  
1
OWhen the unit is used for the first time, first adjust the white balance. (Refer to page 34)  
Chapter 1 General  
The AJ-HDX900 is a video camera-recorder that integrates an HD camera part equipped with a progressive scan (full pixel  
reading) 3-CCD camera unit featuring a 2/3-inch on-chip lens with a VTR that in turn supports the DVCPRO HD-LP format.  
The progressive scan CCD produces high quality pictures with superior image expression.  
The unit is both compact and lightweight, with minimal power consumption. Featuring high picture quality and sensitivity, the  
camera-recorder has excellent mobility and effectively withstands dust, humidity, and moisture. With many other superior  
functions, the unit is the optimum camera-recorder for production.  
1-1 Features of the camera unit  
O Multi-format  
O Y-get function  
The unit supports the following video systems by driving  
the CCD progressively. (Refer to page 30)  
By allocating functions to USER button, it is possible to  
measure the subject’s video level easily. The lens  
aperture can be adjusted precisely for appropriate  
pictures. (Refer to page 62)  
Video system  
1080-59.94i  
Recording format  
1080-59.94i  
O Lens file function  
1080-29.97P  
1080-23.98P  
The unit has 8 lens files.  
By using an SD memory card, 64 lens files can be stored.  
(Refer to page 74)  
1080-59.94i  
(2-3 Pull-down)  
1080-23.98PA  
1080-59.94i  
(2-3-3-2 Pull-down)  
O Data management function  
Within the unit, one user data file and four sets of scene  
file data can be saved.  
By using an SD memory card as the setup cart, up to  
eight sets of setup data can be stored. (Refer to page 64)  
1080-50i  
1080-50i  
1080-25P  
720-59.94P  
720-29.97P  
720-23.98P  
720-50P  
O Color bar  
720-59.94P  
720-50P  
The unit employs the SMPTE color bar, ARIB color bar,  
Split color bar for SNG (Satellite News Gathering) as well  
as the conventional color bar, which is useful for adjusting  
the color monitor. (Refer to page 121)  
720-25P  
O DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function  
The dynamic range can be streched by compressing the  
video signal level of a part with high brightness where  
white-color-skipping phenomena occur during ordinary  
shooting. (Refer to page 62)  
O Storage type high-sensitivity function (DS. GAIN)  
The unit uses the storage type gain increase function by  
driving the CCD progressively. With this function, it is  
possible to obtain brighter pictures without increasing  
noise under low light conditions.  
This is a function that makes it possible to achieve higher  
sensitivity of up to 20 dB above the regular gain increase.  
Furthermore, this function can also be used as picture  
effects.  
O 14-bit A/D conversion digital signal processing  
Analog video signals are processed into digital data by a  
14-bit A/D converter with sampling frequencies of 74 MHz.  
It is possible to reproduce images that are more finely  
detailed.  
O Film-like Gamma function  
The unit employs three types of film-like gamma to easily  
obtain film tones accumulated through Varicam (AJ-  
HDC27 series), so that a wide range of image impressions  
can be reproduced for production. (Refer to page 113)  
7
Chapter 1 General (continued)  
1-2 Features of the VTR unit  
1-3 Features of the Input/Output unit  
O DVCPRO HD-LP format system  
The VTR unit employs the DVCPRO HD-LP recording  
format.  
O DVCPRO (IEEE1394) output provided as a standard  
configuration  
By connecting the non-linear editor to the DVCPRO  
output connector, it is possible to shoot and edit at the  
same time to improve mobility.  
However, control signals and video/audio signals from  
devices connected to the DVCPRO connector cannot be  
received. (Refer to page 16)  
Using the latest compression technology, it achieves two  
times the economy of the conventional DVCPRO HD  
format.  
O PRE RECORDING function provided as a standard  
configuration  
The VTR unit employs the PRE RECORDING function as  
the standard configuration.  
Pictures and voices of up to 7 seconds prior to pressing  
the VTR REC button can be recorded. (Refer to page 26)  
O Two-system output of HD SDI signals provided  
HD SDI outputs are provided independently for Video  
output and Monitor output.  
Since it is possible to turn ON/OFF characters and  
markers independently for the respective outputs, it can  
be used fro video monitoring by video creators or  
recording on hard disks.  
On the HD SDI output, the embedded audio and the time  
code overlap. (Refer to page 31)  
O Interval REC function and ONE-SHOT Recording  
function provided as a standard configuration  
The VTR unit employs the Interval REC function and the  
ONE-SHOT Recording function as the standard  
configuration.  
With memory control, this unit makes it possible to record  
in intervals with a minimum recording time in increments  
of one frame.  
This is particularly useful for shooting science and nature  
programs.  
O Down converter output provided as a standard  
configuration  
The video output can be switched between HD SDI  
signals and down converter output signals (analog  
composite signals).  
Furthermore, when the unit is used for one-shot recording,  
frame-by-frame shooting is easily accomplished.  
(Refer to page 27)  
It is optimum for confirming shot images on the SD  
monitor. (Refer to page 31)  
O SD SDI output provided as a standard configuration  
The video output can be switched between HD SDI  
signals and down converter output signals (serial digital  
component signals).  
O Valid frame information  
The VTR unit supports multiple formats.  
For low frame rates, valid frame information is recorded in  
the user bits etc.  
When HD SDI signals are output, valid frame information  
is also output. (Refer to page 39)  
It is optimum for confirming shot images on the SD  
monitor.  
On the SD SDI output, the embedded audio overlap.  
(Refer to page 31)  
O Input signals from four separate audio channels  
The unit enables audio input signals from four channels to  
be selected separately. Further, the level of the signal in  
each channel can be monitored on the LCD display  
window. (Refer to page 12)  
O Remote control connector  
By connecting the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G), which  
is available as an optional accessory, the unit can be  
controlled remotely. (Refer to page 89)  
O Built-in DOLBY NR  
O Confirmation of return video signals  
It is possible to confirm the return video signals (analog  
HD-Y signals) supplied to the GENLOCK IN connector of  
this unit in the viewfinder to confirm programs.  
(Only video signals from the same video system can be  
confirmed.)  
The CUE audio recording circuitry contains a DOLBY B  
noise reduction circuit.  
O Unislot wireless receiver  
The unit’s construction supports a slot-in wireless  
receiver, which is available as an optional accessory.  
(Refer to page 86)  
(RET SW item: Refer to page 121)  
O DC OUT connector  
The DC OUT connector of the unit produces 1.5 A of  
electrical current.  
By connecting an external switch to this connector, it is  
possible to control REC start/stop.  
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting the LED to  
this connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing  
the camera on a crane. (Refer to page 89)  
8
Chapter 1 General (continued)  
1-4 Other features  
1
O Single action shoulder pad slide function  
It is now possible to adjust the position where the unit is  
optimally balanced for operation using a single-touch  
action. This means that the operator can easily optimize  
the unit’s balance when the lens, battery, and other  
peripheral camera devices have been installed on the  
unit. (Refer to page 88)  
O Viewfinder connection  
From the viewfinder connector of the unit, 1080-59.94i or  
1080-50i signals are output.  
Furthermore, signals are output for switching the  
frequencies of the connected viewfinder.  
Confirm images in multi formats by connecting the  
viewfinder (AJ-HVF21G), which is available as an optional  
accessory. (Refer to page 50)  
O User button  
On the side panel of the unit, three user buttons are  
available.  
For the respective buttons, it is possible to allocate  
functions that are used frequently. (Refer to page 62)  
1-5 Dimensions drawing  
Unit: mm (inch)  
129 (5-1/8)  
329 (13)  
62 (2-1/2)  
9
Chapter 1 General (continued)  
1-6 System configuration  
UniSlot wireless  
microphone receiver:  
Sennheiser EK3041  
Microphone kit:  
AJ-MC900G  
Remote control unit:  
AJ-RC10G  
2-inch electronic HD  
viewfinder:  
AJ-HVF21G  
Battery  
(Mic holder provided)  
PROPAC14, TRIMPAC14,  
HYTRON50/100/120,  
DIONIC90/100/160  
Microphone holder:  
AJ-MH800G  
V-mount type battery plate  
NP-1 type battery holder  
ENDURA7/10, BP-GL65/95  
NP-L7  
Lens  
(Bayonet type):  
Fujinon, Canon  
GPS unit:  
AJ-GPS900G  
(This unit is not  
available in European  
region.)  
Camera-Recorder:  
AJ-HDX900  
External DC  
power supply  
Cleaning tape:  
AJ-CL12MP  
Rain cover:  
SHAN-RC700  
Soft carrying case:  
AJ-SC900  
(not available in some  
area.)  
M Cassette tapes:  
AJ-HP23EMG  
AJ-HP33EMG  
SD memory card  
Hard carrying case:  
AJ-HT901G  
Tripod adapter:  
SHAN-TM700  
<Note>  
All of the devices and accessories other than the unit, which  
are shown in this system configuration, are optionally  
available. To use these devices and accessories, refer to the  
respective operation manuals.  
10  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions  
2-1 Power supply and accessory mounting section  
7
?
6
6
2
2
5
9
8
:
1
4
3
>
=
; <  
1 POWER switch  
: Lens mount cap  
To remove the cap, push the lens lever 9 up.  
This switch turns the power ON and OFF.  
Keep the cap in place while the lens is not attached.  
2 Battery mount  
This is for attaching the Anton/Bauer battery pack.  
; Lens cable/microphone cable clamp  
This clamp is for anchoring the lens cable or microphone  
cable.  
3 DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4-pin)  
This unit is connected to an external DC power supply.  
< Tripod mount  
4 BREAKER switch  
Mount the tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700), available as an  
optional accessory, when the unit is to be anchored to a  
tripod.  
If an excessively high current flows inside the unit due to  
some problem or other, the circuit breaker is tripped and  
the power is automatically turned off to protect the unit.  
Push this button in after an inspection has been  
conducted or repairs performed inside the unit by a  
qualified service person. If there are no problems, the  
power will come back on.  
= LENS jack (12-pin)  
The connecting cord of the lens is connected to this jack.  
For further details on the lenses that can be used, refer to  
the operating instructions of the lenses concerned.  
5 VF connector  
> Easy-to-adjust shoulder pad  
Viewfinder AJ-HVF21G (optional accessory) is connected  
here.  
Insert the connector for the viewfinder firmly until it clicks.  
The position of the shoulder pad can be adjusted  
backward or forward so that the unit is balanced when it is  
carried on the user’s shoulder.  
6 Shoulder belt fittings  
? GPS connector  
The shoulder belt is attached here.  
GPS unit AJ-GPS900G (optional accessory) is connected  
here.  
7 Light shoe  
(GPS unit AJ-GPS900G is not available in Europe region.)  
Use this to attach the video light, etc.  
8 Lens mount (bayonet type)  
The lens is attached to this mount.  
9 Lens lever  
This lever is tightened to secure the lens after it has been  
attached to the lens mount.  
11  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
2-2 Audio function section (input system)  
< >  
=
; :  
3
7
2
6
?
@
5 9  
8
4
1
1 MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 5-pin)  
Connect the microphone (optional accessory) here. The  
power for the microphone is supplied from this jack.  
<Note>  
5 AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio input channel 1 & 2)  
connectors (XLR, 3-pin)  
An audio component or microphones are connected here.  
This unit does not support AES/EBU signals.  
Components of 150 Hz are removed from the signals  
input from this connector.  
6 LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input + 48V)  
selector switch  
2 AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
recording level adjustment) controls  
This is used to switch the audio input signals from the  
audio component which has been connected to the  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 5.  
LINE : The audio input signals from the audio component  
serving as the line input are selected.  
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch 3 is set to  
MAN, the recording level of audio channels 1 and 2 can  
be adjusted using these controls.  
The controls come with a locking mechanism. Therefore,  
to adjust the recording level, simultaneously push in and  
turn the controls.  
MIC : The audio input signals from the internal power  
supply type of microphone are selected. (The  
phantom mic power is not supplied from the unit.)  
+48V: The audio input signals from the external power  
supply type of microphone are selected. (The  
phantom mic power is supplied from the unit.)  
3 AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
automatic/manual level adjustment selector) switch  
This is used to select the method for adjusting the  
recording levels of audio channels 1 and 2.  
7 Wireless receiver slot  
AUTO : Set here for automatic adjustment.  
The UniSlot wireless receiver (optional accessory) can be  
MAN : Set here for manual adjustment.  
attached here.  
4 AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch  
These are used to select the input signals to be recorded  
on audio channels 1 and 2.  
8 FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level  
adjustment) control  
This enables the recording level of audio channels 1 and  
FRONT :  
2 to be adjusted.  
The input signals supplied from the microphone which  
has been connected to the MIC IN jack 1 are  
recorded.  
However, when the AUDIO SELECT switch is set to the  
AUTO position, the audio recording level is automatically  
adjusted.  
W.L. (wireless) :  
When the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen is opened from the VTR  
MENU page by performing a menu operation, whether to  
enable or disable the operation of this level control can be  
set using the FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2  
setting items.  
The input signals from the slot-in wireless microphone  
receiver are recorded.  
REAR :  
The audio input signals supplied from the audio  
component which has been connected to the AUDIO IN  
CH1/CH2 connectors 5 are recorded.  
<Note>  
When you use stereo microphone (AJ-MC900G optional),  
set both CH1 and CH2 to [FRONT]. The signal from L CH  
is recorded to CH1 and that from R CH to CH2.  
12  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
2-2 Audio function section (output system)  
9 AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 5-pin)  
> Speaker  
The audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or  
audio channels 3 and 4 are output from this connector.  
The signals to be output can be selected using the  
MONITOR SELECT CH1/2OCH3/4 selector switch :.  
The EE sound during recording or the playback sound  
during playback can be monitored through this speaker.  
The warning alarms are output in synchronization with the  
flashing or lighting of the warning lamps and warning  
displays.  
2
: MONITOR SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2OCH3/4  
selector switch  
The sound heard from the speaker is automatically cut off  
when earphones are connected to the PHONES jack ?.  
This is used to select the audio channels whose signals  
are to be output to the speaker, earphone and AUDIO  
OUT connector.  
CH1/2 : The signals of audio channels 1 and 2 are output.  
CH3/4 : The signals of audio channels 3 and 4 are output.  
In addition, the channel indications for the audio level  
meters appearing in the display window and viewfinder  
change when this switch is operated.  
? PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)  
This is the earphone (stereo) jack which is used to monitor  
the audio signals. When earphones are connected, the  
sound from the speaker is automatically cut off. The  
sound which is output from the two jacks (front and rear)  
is the same.  
@ DC OUT (DC power supply) output connector  
This normally serves as the DC 12 V output connector. A  
current of approximately 1.5 A can be supplied.  
; MONITOR SELECT (audio selection)  
CH1/3OSTOCH2/4 selector switch  
This is linked with the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2OCH3/4  
selector switch : and used to select the sound which is  
to be output from the speaker, earphone and AUDIO OUT  
connector.  
It is possible to control REC start/stop by connecting an  
external switch to this connector.  
Since a tally lamp can also be used by connecting an LED  
to this connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing  
the camera on a crane.  
CH1/3 : The signals of audio channel 1 or 3 are output.  
ST  
: The stereo audio signals of either audio channels  
1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4 are output.  
Using a menu setting, the stereo signals can be  
changed to MIX signals.  
For details, see “5-11 Connection of the external switch.”  
CH2/4 : The signals of audio channel 2 or 4 are output.  
MONITOR SELECT CH1/2OCH3/4 selector switch  
CH1/2  
Audio channel 1  
2
CH3/4  
Audio channel 3  
2
CH1/3  
ST  
Stereo signals of audio Stereo signals of audio  
channels 1 and 2  
channels 3 and 4  
CH2/4  
Audio channel 2  
Audio channel 4  
2 Either STEREO or MIX can be selected as the setting for the MONITOR  
SELECT item by opening the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen from the VTR  
MENU page by performing a menu operation.  
< MONITOR (volume) control  
This is used to adjust the volume of the monitor speaker  
or earphone.  
= ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)  
This is used to adjust the volume of the warning alarms  
from the earphones which have been connected to the  
speaker > or PHONES jack ?.  
The warning alarms are not audible when this control is at  
its lowest setting.  
13  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
2-3 Shooting and recording/playback function section  
D
G
H
1
4
9 8  
6
5
/REW  
FF/  
EJECT  
STOP  
PLAY/PAUSE  
ª
1/;  
E
F
:
3
;
@
A
J BC  
I
2
<567  
?
=
>
Shooting and recording (camera unit)  
1 CC FILTER/ND FILTER (filter switching) controls  
3 SHUTTER switch  
These are used to select the filter in accordance with the  
This is the ON/OFF selector switch of the electronic  
subject’s brightness and color temperature.  
shutter.  
OFF : The electronic shutter does not operate.  
ON : The electronic shutter operates.  
SEL : This is used when the electronic shutter speed is to  
be changed.  
The switch is a non-locking type. The shutter speed  
changes each time it is operated. For further details, refer  
to “4-3 Setting the electronic shutter.”  
CC FILTER knob (outside, large diameter)  
A: Cross filter  
B: 3200 K  
C: 4300 K  
D: 6300 K  
ND FILTER knob (inside, small diameter)  
1: CLEAR (transparent) 2: 1/4 ND  
3: 1/16 ND  
4: 1/64 ND  
∫ Examples of filter selection  
4 Synchro scan adjustment switches  
Shooting conditions  
CC filter  
ND filter  
These switches become effective when the shutter switch  
3 is set to ON and SYNCHRO SCAN is selected. They  
are used to adjust the synchro scan speed.  
When the “–” switch is pressed, the shutter speed is  
reduced; conversely, when the “+” switch is pressed, it is  
increased.  
During personal computer monitor shooting, etc. adjust  
these switches to the positions where the horizontal bar  
noise inside the viewfinder is decreased.  
Sunrise, sunset, inside a studio  
Outdoors under a clear sky  
B (3200 K)  
C (4300 K) or  
D (6300 K)  
1 (CLEAR)  
2 (1/4 ND) or  
3 (1/16 ND)  
Outdoors under cloudy or rainy  
skies  
D (6300 K)  
1 (CLEAR) or  
2 (1/4 ND)  
Snowscapes, high mountains,  
C (4300 K) or  
3 (1/16 ND) or  
4 (1/64 ND)  
seashores or other perfectly clear D (6300 K)  
scenery  
2 AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch  
AWB: The white balance is automatically adjusted.  
When the WHITE BAL switch on the side panel is  
set to A or B and then the AUTO W/B BAL switch  
is operated, the adjustment value is recorded in the  
memory.  
5 GAIN selector switch  
This is used to select the gain of the video amplifier in  
accordance with the lighting conditions prevailing at the  
time of the shooting. The gain values for the L, M and H  
settings are set ahead of time on the setting menu. Their  
factory settings are 0 dB, 6 dB and 12 dB, respectively.  
Note that the unit does not operate when the  
switch is in PRST position.  
ABB : The black balance is automatically adjusted.  
If the AUTO W/B BAL switch is held down at the  
ABB position for 8 or more seconds, the black  
shading is compensated automatically.  
For details, refer to “4-2 Adjusting the white balance and  
black balance.”  
<Note>  
When white balance or black balance are being  
automatically adjusted and the switch is pressed again to  
either the AWB side or to the ABB side, the automatic  
adjustment for the side pressed will be stopped.  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
14  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
6 OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch  
This switch selects the video signals which are to be  
output from the camera unit to the VTR unit, viewfinder  
and/or video monitor.  
9 MARKER SELECT button  
This is used to select the marker information displays on  
the viewfinder screen. Each time it is pressed, the two  
marker information display screens set by the menu are  
switched in the following sequence: A (A marker display)  
5 B (B marker display) 5 OFF (no marker display) 5 A,  
and so on repeatedly. Note that when the power is  
switched ON, the display on the viewfinder screen  
immediately before the power was switched OFF will  
appear.  
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON:  
2
The images shot by the camera are output.  
The AUTO KNEE circuit operates.  
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF:  
The images shot by the camera are output.  
The MANUAL KNEE circuit operates.  
BARS:  
For details, refer to “4-7-8 Marker check screen displays.”  
Color bar signals are output.  
The AUTO KNEE circuit does not operate.  
: USER MAIN, USER 1 and USER 2 buttons  
A user setting can be allocated to each of these buttons  
using the setting menu. When a button is pressed, the  
user setting mode allocated to it is selected.  
When the button is pressed again, the selected mode is  
released.  
AUTO KNEE function  
When shooting with the level set to people or scenes against a high-  
brightness background, the background will be whitened out, and the  
buildings and scene in the background will be blurred. If the AUTO  
KNEE function is activated at times like this, the background will be  
reproduced clearly. This function is effective for shooting in the following  
situations:  
≥When shooting people in the shade under a clear sky  
≥When simultaneously shooting people in a car or indoors and the  
outside scenery through a window  
For details, refer to “4-8-4 Allocating functions to the  
USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons.”  
≥When shooting scenes with a strong contrast  
Shooting and recording (VTR unit)  
; REC START button  
7 WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector) switch  
This is used to select the method used to adjust the white  
balance.  
When this is pressed, recording starts; when it is pressed  
again, recording stops. This button functions in the same  
way as the lens VTR button.  
PRST:  
Set the switch to this position at times when, for  
instance, there is no time to adjust the white balance.  
The factory setting for the white balance is 3200K, but  
this can be changed to any other value by a menu  
setting. For details, refer to “4-9-4 Setting the color  
temperature manually.”  
< VTR SAVE/STBY (tape protection) switch  
This is used to select the power supply mode when the  
VTR has temporarily stopped recording (REC PAUSE  
mode).  
SAVE: This is the tape protection mode. The cylinder is  
stopped in the half-loading status.  
A or B:  
Less power is consumed than at the STBY  
position, and the operating time provided by the  
battery is prolonged.  
When the switch is set to this position, the SAVE  
lamp inside the viewfinder lights.  
When the AUTO W/B BAL switch 2 is set to AWB, the  
white balance is automatically adjusted, and the  
adjusted value is stored in memory A or memory B.  
For details, refer to “4-2-1 Ajusting the white balance.”  
STBY : When the REC START button ; is pressed,  
recording on tape will start immediately.  
<Notes>  
O This unit employs the PRE RECORDING function as a  
standard configuration.  
8 MODE CHECK button  
Each time this button is pressed, one of the four screen  
pages (STATUS screen display, !LED screen display,  
FUNCTION screen display and AUDIO screen display) is  
selected and displayed on the viewfinder to indicate the  
camera’s settings.  
Images will be recorded immediately after pressing the  
REC START button when this switch is set to either  
SAVE or STBY.  
This does not affect the output signals of the camera.  
However, when the switch is set to SAVE position, the  
length of time for operating the tape travel mechanism  
after stopping the recording by pressing the REC  
START button is slightly longer than when the switch is  
set to STBY position.  
O When the prescribed amount of time has elapsed in the  
STBY mode, the unit is automatically set to the SAVE  
mode. To return the unit to the STBY mode, set the  
VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE, and then again to  
the STBY position.  
15  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
= VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL (output signal selection)  
switch  
D EJECT button  
This is pressed to insert or eject the cassette.  
This is used to select the signals output from the VIDEO  
OUT connector.  
E STOP button  
VTR : In the recording or other EE mode, the camera  
images are output from the connectors; in the  
playback mode, it is the VTR’s playback signals  
which are output.  
CAM : The camera images are output at all times.  
Furthermore, the audio output signals are synchronized  
with the video signals as well.  
This is pressed to stop the tape travel.  
F PLAY/PAUSE button  
This is pressed to view the playback picture on the  
viewfinder screen or using a color video monitor. The  
button’s lamp comes on during playback.  
When it is pressed during playback, the unit is set to  
pause in the playback mode (PLAY PAUSE), and the  
button’s lamp flashes. If the unit is left in the pause mode  
for two minutes, it automatically changes to the stop  
(STOP) mode.  
For details on the video output, refer to “4-8-1 Settings of  
signals output from VIDEO OUT connector.”  
> VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch  
This is used to control the superimposing of the  
characters onto the images which are output from the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
ON : The characters are superimposed onto the images.  
OFF : The characters are not superimposed onto the  
images.  
G REW (rewind) button and lamp  
When this button is pressed during stop, the tape is  
reviewed at high speed. Its lamp lights at this time.  
When it is pressed during playback or pause, the tape is  
reviewed at approximately 4 times the normal tape speed.  
Both the PLAY lamp and REW lamp light at this time.  
During the jump operation, the REW lamp flashes.  
For details on the character types, refer to “4-8-1 Settings  
of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector.”  
? VIDEO OUT (signal switching) switch  
This switch switches the modes of output signals from the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
H FF (fast forward) button and lamp  
When this button is pressed during stop, the tape is cued  
at high speed. Its lamp lights at this time.  
HD SDI: To output HD SDI signals  
SD SDI: To output the down-converted SD SDI signals  
When it is pressed during playback or pause, the tape is  
cued at approximately 4 times the normal tape speed.  
Both the PLAY lamp and FF lamp light at this time.  
VBS:  
To output the down-converted composite video  
signals  
I EMERGENCY screw (inside rubber cap)  
@ VIDEO OUT connector  
If the cassette does not eject even when the EJECT  
button is pressed, use a screwdriver or similar implement  
to push and turn the EMERGENCY screw at the same  
time: this will cause the cassette to be ejected.  
This is an output connector for video signals. Video  
signals linked to the setting of the VIDEO OUT switch (=,  
>, ?) are output from here.  
For details, refer to “6-3-3 Emergency eject.”  
A REMOTE (remote control) connector  
The AJ-RC10G remote control unit (optional accessory) is  
connected here.  
B MON OUT (Monitor) connector  
This is the connector for outputting the video signal which  
is used for monitoring.  
HD SDI signals or analog HD Y signals are output from  
here.  
Whether characters are to be superimposed onto the  
images output from the VIDEO OUT connector can be  
selected separately using the internal menu.  
For details, refer to “4-8-2 Settings for signals output from  
the MON OUT connector.”  
C GENLOCK IN connector  
The HD Y reference signal is supplied to this connector  
when the camera unit is to be gen-locked or the time code  
is to be externally locked.  
Composite video signals may be input as the reference  
signal instead but, in this case, the H phase cannot be  
adjusted. Also, it is not possible to externally lock the sub  
carrier of the unit’s down-converter output (composite  
video signal).  
O Returned video images can be confirmed in the  
viewfinder screen by entering HD-Y signals.  
16  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
J DVCPRO connector  
2-4 Menu operation section  
This is an output connector for video, voice, and data that  
comply with the IEEE1394 standard.  
<Notes>  
O It is impossible to input signals from external devices.  
O Power is not supplied from the unit.  
O Before proceeding to connect or disconnect the DV  
cable (IEEE1394), be absolutely sure to turn off the  
power of the units that are to be connected or  
disconnected using this cable.  
2
O Before proceeding to connect  
4
3
the unit which uses a 6-pin  
type of DV connector,  
carefully check the shape of  
the connectors on the DV  
cable and unit. Connecting a  
6-pin type  
connector upside down may  
damage the parts inside the  
4-pin type  
camera-recorder and cause  
2
malfunctioning.  
Always connect the DV cable to the unit with the 6-pin  
type DV connector first.  
1
O You can connect a digital video unit equipped with a  
DV connector and digitally transfer video and audio  
signals as well as time codes and other information.  
O When a DV cable has been connected to the DV  
connector, do not apply any strong external force as  
this may damage the connector.  
1 MENU button  
This is used to switch the menu ON and OFF.  
2 JOG dial button  
This is used to select the menu items and perform  
settings when the MENU button 1 is at the ON position.  
O To control start/stop of recording operation on the  
external recording device connected to the DVCPRO  
connector using the unit, set the 1394 CONTROL item  
on the menu (OPTION MODE screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page) to “BOTH” (the default setting when  
shipped from the factory is BOTH).  
O When the FireStore FS-100 is used in 1080i mode as  
an external recording device, set the VITC UB MODE  
item (TC/UB screen on the VTR MENU page) to “FRM  
RATE”, so that the frame rates of the unit can be  
displayed on the display panel of the FS-100.  
If it is used in 720P mode, frame rates are not  
displayed properly but video images will be recorded  
properly.  
3 Setup card insertion slot  
This is where the SD memory card (optional accessory) is  
inserted into the unit.  
4 BUSY (operation mode display) lamp  
This lamp shows the operation mode of the setup card. It  
lights during operation.  
<Note>  
When this lamp is lighted, refrain from inserting or  
removing the card.  
17  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
2-5 Time code related section  
4
5
6
9
1
3
2
7
8
1 GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)  
7 “+” button, “–” button  
The HD Y reference signal is supplied to this connector  
when the camera unit is to be gen-locked or the time code  
is to be externally locked. It is also possible to supply  
composite video signals instead as the reference signal.  
These are used to increment or decrement by 1 the figure  
in the digit which was made to flash by the SHIFT button  
8 when the time code or user bits are to be set.  
8 SHIFT button  
2 TC IN connector (BNC)  
This causes the digit to be set to flash when the time code  
Supply the time code which will serve as the reference to  
this connector when externally locking the time code.  
<Note>  
or user bits are to be set.  
9 TCG (time code selector) switch  
A time code with the same format as the system mode of  
This is used to set the running mode of the built-in time  
the unit must be input.  
code generator.  
F-RUN : Set here to have the time code run all the time  
regardless of the VTR’s operation.  
3 TC OUT connector (BNC)  
To lock the time code of an external VTR to the unit’s time  
code, connect this connector to the time code input (TC  
IN) connector on the external VTR.  
This position is used to align the time code with  
the time or externally lock the time code.  
: Set here when the time code or user bits are to  
SET  
be set.  
4 HOLD button  
R-RUN : Set here to have the time code run only during  
The time data display of the counter display section which  
was on the screen at the moment when this button is  
pressed is held. (However, the time code generator  
keeps running.) When the button is pressed again, the  
hold status is released.  
recording. The time code on the tape with  
scene-to-scene  
continuously.  
continuity  
is  
recorded  
It is used, for instance, to find out the time code or CTL  
counter value at which a particular scene was shot.  
5 RESET button  
This is used to reset the time data on the counter display  
section to “00:00:00:00.” If it is pressed while the TCG  
switch 9 is at the SET position, the time code data and  
user bits data are respectively reset to “00:00:00:00.”  
6 DISPLAY switch  
This is used to display the time code, CTL or user bits on  
the counter display section depending on the setting  
positions of this switch and the TCG switch 9.  
UB : The user bits are displayed.  
TC : The time code is displayed.  
CTL : CTL is displayed.  
18  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
2-6 Warning/status display section  
2-7 Display window and its displays  
Remaining tape and remaining battery charge and  
audio channel level displays  
2
1
2
Remaining tape display  
The remaining tape time is displayed using 7 segments.  
The remaining tape time indicated by each segment is set to 3 minutes or 5  
minutes using TAPE REMAIN/∫ on the VTR MENU “BATTERY/TAPE”  
screen. Each time the number of minutes set for the segments elapses, one  
segment is cleared.  
4
3
5
OVER  
OVER  
NDF SLAVE HOLD  
GPS  
0
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
B
F
TAPE  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
13  
24  
6
Remaining battery charge display  
If a battery with a digital display (% display) is used, all 7 segments  
up to the “F” position light when the 70% or more of the battery  
charge remains.  
1 Back tally lamp  
When the back tally switch 2 is set to ON, this lamp  
serves the same function as the front tally lamp in the  
viewfinder.  
When there is less than 70% of the battery charge remaining, the  
segments go out one by one in sequence every time the remaining  
charge drops by 10%. It is also possible to set all 7 segments to light  
at a 100% battery charge by selecting 100% as the setting for BATT  
REMAIN FULL on the <BATTERY/TAPE> screen of the VTR menu.  
2 Back tally switch  
This is used to control the unit’s back tally lamp 1 and  
rear tally lamp 6.  
ON : The back tally lamp and rear tally lamp operate.  
OFF : The back tally lamp and rear tally lamp do not  
operate.  
Audio channel level meter  
When the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2OCH3/4 switch is set to  
CH1/2, numbers 1 and 2 indicating the audio channels appear, and  
the CH1 and CH2 audio levels are displayed. Conversely, when it  
is set to CH3/4, numbers 3 and 4 indicating the audio channels  
appear, and the CH3 and CH4 audio levels are displayed.  
3 WARNING lamp  
Displays relating to the VTR unit’s operations and  
modes  
When a problem of some form or other occurs within the  
VTR unit, this lamp flashes or lights.  
Error code display  
(for details, refer to “6-3 Warning system”)  
4 LIGHT switch  
This controls the lighting of the display window.  
Each time it is pressed, the lighting of the display window  
5 is set in turn from on to off or vice versa.  
OVER  
OVER  
NDF SLAVE HOLD  
GPS  
0
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC  
10  
20  
30  
5 Display window  
This displays the alarms, remaining battery charge, audio  
levels, time data, etc. relating to the VTR unit.  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
B
F
TAPE  
BATT  
6 Rear TALLY lamp  
40  
When the back tally switch 2 is set to ON, this lamp  
operates in exactly the same way as the back tally lamp.  
OO  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
13  
24  
Warning displays  
RF:  
Clogged video head  
SERVO: Servo disturbance  
HUMID: Formation of condensation on the head drum  
SLACK: Problem in tape take-up  
For details, refer to “6-3 Warning system.”  
19  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
Time code-related switch settings and display  
items  
Mode displays  
GPS:  
GPS  
Lights when signals cannot be received during GPS operation.  
:
Lights when signals are being received during GPS operation.  
Lights in pre-recording mode and flashes during the time set for  
pre-recording after the tally lamp for recording has turned off.  
Lights during recording when the interval recording mode is  
established; flashes during recording standby.  
P-REC:  
DISPLAY switch  
position  
TCG switch position  
Display item  
iREC:  
i:  
TC or CTL  
Time code  
Flashes when the interval recording mode has been selected.  
SET  
UB  
CTL  
TC  
User bits  
CTL  
OVER  
OVER  
NDF SLAVE HOLD  
GPS  
0
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
Time code  
User bits  
E
E
B
F
TAPE  
BATT  
40  
UB  
OO  
-dB  
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK  
13  
24  
Displays relating to the time code  
NDF:  
DF:  
SLAVE:  
HOLD:  
CTL:  
Lights when the time code is in the non-drop frame mode.  
Lights when the time code is in the drop frame mode.  
Lights when the time code is locked externally.  
Lights when the time generator/reader value is being held.  
Lights when CTL is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the  
CTL count value is displayed.  
TCG:  
TC:  
Lights when TC (or UB) is selected by the DISPLAY switch  
and the TC (or UB) generator value is displayed.  
Lights when TC (or UB) is selected by the DISPLAY switch  
and the TC (or UB) reader value is displayed.  
Lights when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the  
VIUB generator value is displayed.  
Lights when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the  
VIUB reader value is displayed.  
Lights when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the  
values of the hour, minutes and seconds in real time are  
displayed.  
VTCG:  
VTC:  
TIME:  
DATE:  
Lights when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the  
values of the year, month and day are displayed in real time.  
No display: Remains off when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and  
the real-time values of the hour and minutes in the time zone  
are displayed.  
Time counter display:  
The time code, CTL, user bits and real time are displayed.  
<Note>  
When UB has been selected by the DISPLAY switch, each time the HOLD  
button is pressed, the setting is switched in the following sequence: VTCG  
(VTC) 5 DATE 5 TIME 5 no display (time zone) 5 TCG (TC) and so on  
repeatedly.  
20  
Chapter 2 Parts and their functions (continued)  
8 Back tally lamp  
2-8 Viewfinder section  
This lamp lights while the VTR unit is recording. It also  
flashes to provide a warning display like the REC lamp  
inside the viewfinder.  
When the lever is set to OFF, the back tally lamp is  
hidden.  
=
> ; 7  
9
2
:
<
1
9 Eyepiece  
Do not point the eyepiece at the sun.  
Doing so may damage the parts inside.  
: Diopter adjustment ring  
This is adjusted in line with the camera operator’s diopter  
in such a way that the user can see the image on the  
viewfinder screen most clearly.  
8
ON  
4 5 2 3 6  
OFF  
; Connecting plug  
< Locking ring  
1 Viewfinder (optional accessory)  
While recording or playback is underway, pictures can be  
viewed through the viewfinder in black and white. The  
warning displays concerning the unit’s operation statuses  
and settings, messages, zebra patterns and markers  
(safety zone markers and center marker) can also be  
seen in the viewfinder.  
= Microphone holder  
> Viewfinder stopper  
This is used to attach and remove the viewfinder.  
2 ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
This is used to display the zebra pattern in the viewfinder.  
ON : The zebra pattern is displayed.  
OFF : The zebra pattern is not displayed.  
@
?
3 TALLY switch  
This is used to control the front tally lamp 7.  
HIGH: The brightness of the front tally lamp is increased.  
OFF : The front tally lamp is turned off.  
LOW : The brightness of the front tally lamp is reduced.  
4 PEAKING control  
This is used to enhance the outlines of the images seen  
inside the viewfinder to make focusing easier. Its  
adjustment does not affect the output signals of the  
camera.  
5 CONTRAST control  
This is used to adjust the contrast of the picture seen  
inside the viewfinder. Its adjustment does not affect the  
output signals of the camera.  
? Viewfinder left-right position anchoring ring  
This is used to adjust the left-right position of the  
viewfinder.  
6 BRIGHT control  
This is used to adjust the brightness of the picture seen  
inside the viewfinder. Its adjustment does not affect the  
output signals of the camera.  
@ Viewfinder front-back position anchoring ring  
This is used to adjust the front-back position of the  
viewfinder.  
7 Front tally lamp  
<Note>  
This lamp is activated when the TALLY switch 3 is set to  
the HIGH or LOW position, and it lights while the VTR unit  
is recording. It also flashes to provide a warning display  
like the REC lamp inside the viewfinder. The lamp’s  
brightness (HIGH or LOW) when it is lighted can be  
selected using the TALLY switch.  
For more information, see the instruction manual for the  
viewfinder.  
21  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback  
3-1 Cassette tapes  
Checking for tape slack  
Gently push in the reel using your finger and turn the reel  
Loading a cassette tape  
in the direction of the arrow. If the reel fails to turn, it  
means there is no tape slack.  
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
1
<Note>  
When condensation has formed inside the unit, the  
HUMID display lights. Wait until this display is cleared  
before proceeding with the intended operation.  
HUMID display  
Ejecting the cassette tape  
While the power is still on, press the EJECT button to open  
the cassette holder, and take out the cassette tape. If  
another cassette is not going to be loaded immediately after  
this tape is ejected, close the cassette holder.  
Ejecting the cassette when the battery has no  
charge  
POWER: ON  
First, set the POWER switch to OFF to turn off the unit’s  
power.  
Then turn the power back on, and immediately hold down the  
EJECT button.  
The cassette can be removed when there is still some power  
left in the battery. However, do not repeat this operation.  
Press the EJECT button.  
The cassette holder opens.  
2
EJECT button  
To prevent accidental erasure  
Set the cassette’s tab to SAVE to prevent the recordings on  
the tape from being erased accidentally.  
REC  
SAVE  
Cassette holder  
Insert the cassette tape and press the part marked with  
the arrow to close the cassette holder securely.  
3
<Note>  
Check that there is no slack in the tape of the cassette.  
22  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback (continued)  
Up to performing the switch settings  
3-2 Basic procedures  
Provide the power supply, and load the cassette. Next, set  
each switch as shown in the figure below, and then proceed  
to operate.  
This section describes the basic steps for shooting and  
recording.  
Before actually departing to shoot scenes, carry out  
inspections to ensure that the system is functioning properly.  
Switch settings for shooting and recording  
AUDIO SELECT  
* For details on how to perform these inspections, refer to “6-1  
Inspections prior to shooting.”  
OUTPUT:  
CH 1/CH 2:  
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON  
AUTO  
3
From providing the power supply to loading the  
cassette  
Attach a fully charged battery pack.  
1
Set the POWER switch to ON. Now check that the  
2
HUMID display is not showing and that at least 5  
segments of the remaining battery charge display are  
lighted.  
TCG:  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
≥If the HUMID display is showing, wait until it goes off.  
≥When five or more segments of the remaining battery  
charge display have not lighted, first check the battery  
setting. If there is nothing wrong with the battery  
setting, replace the existing battery pack with a fully  
charged battery pack.  
GAIN:  
Normally set to 0 dB; change to  
more suitable value if the  
picture is too dark.  
a
When the MODE CHECK button is pressed to display  
the status screen in the viewfinder, the type of set  
battery is shown on the top right of the screen.  
Check that there are no cables around the cassette  
holder or top panel, and then press the EJECT button to  
open the cassette holder.  
3
After checking the following points, insert the cassette  
4
tape and close the cassette holder.  
≥Position of the accidental erasure prevent tab  
≥Tape slack  
MODE CHECK button  
3
4
2
2
1
23  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback (continued)  
From adjusting the white balance and black balance to stopping the  
recording  
Procedure for shooting  
From adjusting the white balance and black  
balance to stopping the recording  
Select the filter to match the lighting conditions.  
1
If the white balance has been stored in the  
memory ahead of time:  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to “A” or “B.”  
2-1  
If the white balance and/or black balance have not  
been stored in the memory and there is no time to  
adjust the white balance:  
2-2  
3
1
4
5, 6 2-3 2-1, 2, 3  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
The white balance for the filter is achieved in  
accordance with the setting position of the CC FILTER  
control (outer).  
CAUTION:  
The unit records video and audio signals into the built-in  
memory once, and then reads these signals out and  
records them on tape. Thus, video images or voice for 2 to  
3 seconds will be recorded on tape, when you start  
recording while the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to the  
SAVE position and then stop it immediately by pressing the  
REC START button or the VTR button on the lens.  
When adjusting the white balance on the spot:  
2-3  
Select the filter to match the lighting conditions, set the  
WHITE BAL switch to “A” or “B” and adjust the white  
balance as follows:  
1 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the AWB  
position and adjust the white balance.  
2 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the ABB  
position and adjust the black balance.  
3 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the AWB  
position and adjust the white balance again.  
* For details on how to perform the adjustments, refer to “4-2-1  
Adjusting the white balance” and “4-2-2 Adjusting the black  
balance.”  
Point the camera at the subject, and adjust the focus  
and zoom.  
3
When the electronic shutter is to be used, set the shutter  
speed and operating mode.  
4
* For further details, refer to “4-3 Setting the electronic shutter.”  
Press the REC START button or lens VTR button to start  
recording.  
During recording, the REC lamp inside the viewfinder  
lights.  
5
To stop the recording, press the REC START button  
again.  
The REC lamp inside the viewfinder goes off.  
6
Tape function buttons  
During recording, the tape function buttons (EJECT, REW,  
FF, PLAY/PAUSE and STOP) will not work.  
24  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback (continued)  
3-3 Scene-to-scene continuity  
Maintaining continuity from one scene to the next at an  
accuracy of +1 frame or less can be assured simply by  
pressing the REC START button or VTR button on the lens  
while the unit is in the rec-pause mode.  
Jump function  
To jump to the starting point of the unrecorded section of a  
tape, open the <SW MODE> screen from the OPERATION  
page, and set the RET SW item to R. REVIEW.  
If the unit is in a mode other than rec-pause, the point at  
which the scene-to-scene continuity is to be maintained must  
be located before recording is started.  
When the recorded tape is replayed to the starting point of  
the unrecorded section, the recording head is at Position B.  
If the RET button of the lens or the USER button that is  
allocated the RET SW function is pressed once in this state,  
the tape will rewind for 5 seconds.  
3
Scene-to-scene continuity during rec-pause  
The scene-to-scene continuity timing is located  
automatically.  
≥ When the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to “SAVE”, the  
tape loading operation will complete about 2 seconds after  
pressing the REC START button.  
≥ When the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to “STBY”, the  
tape loading operation has completed.  
≥ When recording with the switch set to STBY position, the  
tape travel mechanism will stop 2 seconds after pressing  
the REC START button.  
If the recorded section cannot be found, press this button  
again.  
If the recorded section is recognized during the rewind  
operation, such as Position C, the tape will be rewound for  
an additional 2 seconds from the termination point A of the  
recording and then played back for 2 seconds; the tape then  
pauses the recording at the termination point A.  
Press the REC START button or the VTR button of the lens  
to continue recording from the termination point A.  
(In this case, the time code is regenerated as a value for  
position A on the tape if the TCG switch is set to the R-RUN  
position.)  
When pre-recording is set to 7 seconds, it takes 7 seconds  
or more to stop the tape travel mechanism after pressing  
the REC START button.  
When the tape is rewound to the recorded section, the  
recording head is at Position D. If the RET button of the lens  
or the USER button that is allocated the RET SW function is  
pressed once in the STOP mode, the tape rewind for 2  
seconds, and then replay for 2 seconds before entering into  
the pause state for recording at position D.  
Ensuring scene-to-scene continuity after the  
power was turned off while the unit was in the rec-  
pause mode  
During the pause in playback, the tape pauses the recording  
at position D without rewinding or playing back the tape. (In  
this case, the time code will be regenerated as a value for  
position D on the tape if the TCG switch is set to the R-RUN  
position.)  
Switch the power back on.  
1
Press the REC START button or lens VTR button to start  
the recording.  
2
O During the jump operation, the REW lamp flashes and the  
JUMP indication in the viewfinder screen flashes.  
<Notes>  
O When the cassette tab is in the “SAVE” position, the jump  
operation is disabled.  
O By executing the jump operation while the TCG switch is  
set to the R-RUN position, time codes will always be  
regenerated to the value on the tape.  
1
2
Even if the TCG switch is set to the SET position or the F-  
RUN position, the time code will be rewritten to the value  
on the tape when the jump operation is executed after  
returning the switch to the R-RUN position. When  
recording starts, the unit regenerates the time code to the  
value on the tape. Even if the FIRST REC TC item of the  
menu (TC/UB screen of the VTR MENU page) is set to  
PRESET, the time code will always be regenerated to the  
value on the tape by executing the jump operation after  
setting the TCG switch to the R-RUN position.  
2 seconds  
C
2 seconds  
5 seconds  
D
A
B
Recorded  
section  
Unrecorded  
section  
Forward direction of the tape  
25  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback (continued)  
<Notes>  
Transitions with the jump operation  
≥ If the PRE REC MODE items is set to “OFF”, recording  
starts about 0.4 seconds after pressing the REC START  
button when the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to either  
SAVE or STBY position.  
If the PRE REC MODE item is set to “ON,” video signals  
for the time set in the PRE REC TIME item before starting  
are recorded.  
≥ The data contained in the storage memory becomes  
unstable immediately after the power is turned on,  
immediately after the PRE REC MODE item setting is  
selected or its set time has been changed, and  
immediately after playback or rec-review has been  
performed. Immediately after any of these operations,  
therefore, the video and audio signals will not be pre-  
recorded for the duration set when recording is started by  
pressing the REC START button or VTR button on the  
lens.  
Recorded section D  
Section not recorded (B, C)  
Pause for  
replaying  
Pause for  
replaying  
No recorded section is available.  
O Rewinding for 5 seconds  
O Time code regeneration  
Pause for  
recording  
Pause for  
recording  
No recorded section is available.  
O Rewinding for 5 seconds  
O Time code regeneration  
O Rewound for 2 seconds  
and then played back  
≥ The video data and audio data are not stored in the  
storage memory while playback or rec-review is being  
performed. This means that the pre-recording will not  
include the video and audio signals supplied during a  
playback or rec-review operation.  
≥ When recording has been started, the time code (TCG)  
display may remain in the hold status until it is possible for  
the time code (TCR) on the tape to be read.  
Stopped  
Stopped  
No recorded section is available.  
O Rewinding for 5 seconds  
Rec-review  
For details, refer to “3-7 To  
check the last few seconds of the  
recording (Rec-review function)”.  
If the recorded section is found  
O Rewound to the recorded part  
O Time code regeneration  
O Rewound for  
played back  
2
seconds and then  
REC start  
(recording start)  
REC pause  
Real-time video signals  
Real-time audio signals  
A
B
C
3-4 To record video signals of a few  
seconds before starting recording  
(PRE-RECORDING function)  
PRE-REC time set  
What is recorded on the  
tape  
Previous cut  
A
B
By always storing a few seconds’ worth (maximum of 7  
seconds) of audio and video data shot by the camera, it is  
possible to record video and audio signals a few seconds  
before recording is actually started by pressing the REC  
START button or the VTR button on the lens in the built-in  
memory.  
In order for this function to be used, it is necessary to open  
the <REC FUNCTION> screen from the SYSTEM SETTING  
page and set the data storage time in memory using the PRE  
REC MODE item and the PRE REC TIME item using the  
menu operation.  
PRE REC MODE  
ON: PRE RECORDING function is activated.  
OFF: Recording starts about 0.4 seconds after pressing  
the REC START button or the VTR button on the  
lens.  
If you stop recording by pressing the REC START  
button or the VTR button on the lens, the message  
“TAPE ¢S” will be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen.  
PRE REC TIME  
From 0 to 7 seconds:  
A value from 0 to 7 seconds is set as the length of time  
for which the video and audio signals can be recorded  
before the REC START button or the VTR button on  
the lens is pressed.  
26  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback (continued)  
3-5 Recording in intervals  
(INTERVAL REC function)  
iREC start  
Time base  
REC TIME  
(recording  
time = t1)  
This unit enables recording in intervals with a minimum  
recording time in increments of one frame, by using the built-  
in memory.  
t1  
1
t1  
2
t1  
t1  
t1  
N
Real-time video signals  
Real-time audio signals  
3
N-1  
PAUSE TIME  
(pause time  
= t2)  
In order to use this function, it is necessary to use the menu  
operations to open the <REC FUNCTION> screen from the  
SYSTEM SETTING page, select the interval recording mode  
by using the INTERVAL REC MODE item (INTERVAL REC  
MODE: ON), and set the recording time (REC TIME), interval  
pause time (PAUSE TIME), and time required for shooting  
(TAKE TOTAL TIME). Upon completion of the settings, the  
total shooting time (TOTAL REC TIME) is automatically  
calculated and displayed.  
t2  
t2  
t2  
3
TOTAL TAKE TIME  
(time required for shooting)  
What is recorded on the tape  
1
2
3
N-1  
N
TOTAL REC TIME  
(time during which signals are recorded on tape)  
INTERVAL REC MODE  
When the recording is to be continued  
OFF: Interval recording is not performed.  
ON: Interval recording is performed.  
ONE SHOT:  
Press the unit’s REC START button or VTR button on the  
lens once more. Interval recording is now started again.  
One-shot interval recording is performed for the time  
which was selected by the REC TIME setting.  
When recording is to be suspended at any time  
INTERVAL REC HOLD  
Press the STOP button. Recording is now suspended.  
O The tape may continue to run since the unit will record the  
images stored in the memory until the moment when the  
button is pressed.  
ON: When the power is turned off, the INTERVAL REC  
MODE settings are retained.  
OFF: When the power is turned off, the INTERVAL REC  
MODE settings are released.  
When the INTERVAL REC mode is to be exited  
Procedure for shooting in the ON modes of  
INTERVAL REC  
There are two ways to do this.  
1) Using the menu operations, set the INTERVAL REC  
HOLD item to OFF to turn off the POWER switch of the  
unit.  
After performing the basic operations for shooting and  
1
recording as set forth in “3-2 Basic procedures,” secure  
When the INTERVAL REC HOLD item is set to ON, the  
interval recording settings are not released even if the  
POWER switch on the unit is turned off.  
the unit in such a way that it will not move.  
2) Perform a menu operation and select OFF as the  
INTERVAL REC MODE item setting.  
Press the unit’s REC START button or the VTR button on  
2
the lens. Interval recording now starts. When the set  
TOTAL TAKE TIME has elapsed, recording is ended  
automatically.  
As mentioned in “2-7 Display window and its displays,”  
“i” flashes when the INTERVAL REC mode is selected.  
As soon as recording starts, “iREC” lights. During rec-  
pause, “iREC” flashes.  
Exactly what mode is  
established in the unit can be ascertained by observing  
these displays.  
The same displays as the ones in the display window also  
appear inside the viewfinder, and the TALLY lamp lights  
while recording is underway. Further, when the pause time  
has been set to 2 minutes or more, the tally lamp blinks at 5  
second intervals to inform the operator. Further, when  
pause time has been set to 2 minutes or more, the tally  
lamp blinks at 5 second intervals to indicate when recording  
is paused. Under these conditions, the tally lamp will also  
flash 3 seconds before recording starts.  
27  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback (continued)  
Checkpoints common to all INTERVAL REC modes  
Frame-by-frame shooting  
Procedure for shooting in the ONE SHOT mode  
≥ Sound-related  
Whether the sound is to be recorded or not during interval  
recording is set by setting ON or OFF for the AUDIO REC  
item on the <REC FUNCTION> screen.  
The INTERVAL REC MODE item is set to ONE SHOT. (The  
PAUSE TIME item cannot be set.)  
≥ Tape function button-related  
After performing the basic operations for shooting and  
recording as set forth in “3-2 Basic procedures,” secure  
the unit in such a way that it will not move.  
During interval recording, all the tape function buttons  
(EJECT, REW, FF and PLAY/STILL) except STOP do not  
work.  
1
≥ When the unit’s power was turned off during recording  
If the unit’s POWER switch was set to the OFF position  
during interval recording with the use of the memory, the  
tape will continue to run in order to record the video signals  
which were stored in the memory until the moment when  
the POWER switch was set to OFF, and then the power  
will automatically go off.  
Press the unit’s REC START button or the VTR button  
on the lens. When the set REC TIME has elapsed, the  
recording is ended automatically.  
As mentioned in “2-7 Display window and its displays,”  
“i” flashes when the INTERVAL REC mode is selected.  
As soon as recording starts, “iREC” lights.  
2
If the battery was removed, the DC cable was  
disconnected or the power supplied through the external  
DC power supply was cut off during recording, those shots  
(Maximum 5 seconds, 150 frames) taken prior to the  
moment concerned may not be recorded. Bear this in  
mind when the battery is to be replaced.  
When the recording ends, “iREC” flashes.  
The same displays as the ones in the display window  
also appear inside the viewfinder, and the TALLY lamp  
lights while recording is underway.  
iREC  
≥ When the tape has run out during recording  
Bear in mind that if the tape has run out and stops during  
interval recording with the use of the memory, those shots  
(Maximum 5 seconds, 150 frames) taken prior to the  
moment when the tape stopped may not be recorded.  
≥ Starting recording quickly when unit is in pause mode  
Selecting REC as the setting for one of either USER MAIN  
or USER1/USER2 buttons in advance enables quick start  
recording during pause mode when the set button is  
pressed. Measurement of pause mode time is continued  
even after quick start recording.  
≥ If a PLAY, FF or REW operation is performed after one-  
shot recording, the operation will be performed after the  
images remaining in the memory are written on the tape.  
While the images are being recorded, the LED of the  
button pressed (for play, FF or REW operation) will flash.  
≥ Concerning the time code display  
Time base  
start  
REC TIME  
(recording time = t1)  
Real-time video signals  
Real-time audio signals  
A
t
What is recorded on the tape Previous cut  
A
When the recording is to be continued  
Press the unit’s REC START button or VTR button on the  
lens once more. One-shot recording is now started again.  
O For ONE SHOT mode, the unit is always in the standby  
state regardless of the positions of the VTR SAVE/STBY  
switch.  
When recording has been started, the time code (TCG)  
display may remain in the hold status until it is possible for  
the time code (TCR) on the tape to be read.  
When the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC is to  
be exited  
≥ After turning the power ON, inserting a tape, or pressing  
PLAY/FF/REW, the first recording made with INTERVAL  
REC (including ONE SHOT mode) will be about 1 second  
longer than the time set in the REC TIME menu option.  
This is to guarantee the quality of consecutive recordings  
and is not a defect.  
There are two ways to do this.  
1) Use the menu operations to set the INTERVAL REC  
HOLD item to OFF to turn off the POWER switch of the  
unit.  
When the INTERVAL REC HOLD item is set to ON, the  
interval recording settings are not released even if the  
POWER switch on the unit is turned off.  
2) Perform a menu operation and select OFF as the  
INTERVAL REC MODE item setting.  
28  
Chapter 3 Recording and playback (continued)  
<Notes>  
3-6 To take the previous cut again  
≥The rec-review function cannot be used unless recording  
(RETAKE function)  
lasts for one or more seconds.  
≥If the VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel  
is at the VTR position during the rec-review operation, the  
rec-review images are output not only to the viewfinder but  
to the video output connector (VIDEO OUT connector) as  
well.  
Use the menu operations to open the <OUTPUT SEL>  
screen from the SYSTEM SETTING page and set the  
MONI OUT MODE item to VTR to output video signals of  
Rec-review from the MON OUT connector as well.  
Bear in mind that if back-up images are being recorded by  
a backup VTR that has been connected, these rec-review  
images will end up being recorded.  
The RETAKE function ensures continuity with the previous  
cut on the tape when shooting is resumed.  
It is set by opening the <REC FUNCTION> screen from the  
SYSTEM SETTING page and selecting ON as the setting for  
the RETAKE MODE item by performing menu operations.  
3
The RETAKE MODE item settings are described below.  
ON: The retake operation is performed when the RET  
button on the lens is pressed while the MODE CHECK  
button is held down.  
OFF: The RETAKE function does not operate.  
If, when the rec-pause mode is established upon completion  
of the recording or the stop mode is established afterwards,  
the RET button on the lens is pressed while the MODE  
CHECK button is held down, the tape will be rewound to the  
approximate start point (a position advanced by 10 or so  
frames from the recording start) of the final image that was  
last recorded, and the rec-pause mode will be established.  
If there is some leeway in the shooting time and a “NG”  
condition has been clearly identified, recording can be  
started from this point, and the cut in the NG area will be  
deleted.  
The jump function as a relevant function. For details, refer  
to “3-3 Scene-to-scene continuity.”  
≥After executing the rec-view operation, the time code at the  
time of recording the following data will correspond to the  
settings in the REC REVIEW REGEN item (<TC/UB>  
screen on the VTR MENU page).  
≥When the REC REVIEW REGEN item is turned ON and  
the rec-view operation is executed while the TCG switch is  
set to the R-RUN position, the time code will always be  
regenerated to the value on the tape.  
Even if the TCG switch is set to the SET position or the F-  
RUN position, the time code will be rewritten to the value  
on the tape when the rec-veiw operation is executed after  
returning the switch to the R-RUN position. When recording  
starts, the unit regenerates the time code to the value on  
the tape. Even if the FIRST REC TC item of the menu  
(TC/UB screen of the VTR MENU page) is set to PRESET,  
the time code will always be regenerated to the value on  
the tape by executing the rec-view operation after setting  
the TCG switch to the R-RUN position.  
This function is particularly useful for cutting the amount of  
time taken for copying onto work tapes and other such  
economical operations.  
Direction of tape travel  
Cut 1  
Cut 2  
Cut 3  
Approx. 10 frames  
Cut 4  
Cut 1  
Cut 2  
Direction of tape travel  
Rec-pause  
Cut 3  
Recording section  
No recorded or already recorded section  
When the RETAKE function is to be exited  
2 to 10 sec.  
There are two ways to do this.  
Rec-review operation  
Playback of recorded section  
Rec-pause  
1) Set the unit’s POWER switch to OFF.  
2) Perform a menu operation and select OFF as the  
RETAKE MODE item setting.  
3-7 To check the last few seconds of  
the recording  
3-8 Normal playback and playback  
at different speeds  
(Rec-review function)  
Black-and-white playback images can be viewed in the  
viewfinder by pressing the PLAY button. When a color  
monitor is connected to the unit’s VIDEO OUT connector and  
an HD color video monitor is connected to its MON OUT  
connector at the same time, the down-converted color  
playback images from the VIDEO OUT connector can be  
viewed on the color monitor while the HD high-quality images  
from the MON OUT connector can be viewed on the HD  
color video monitor.  
When recording is temporarily stopped and the lens RET  
button is pressed, the last two seconds of the tape are  
automatically rewound, and the playback pictures on this part  
of the tape appear on the viewfinder screen. This makes it  
possible to check whether recording was performed properly.  
After the two seconds of the tape have been played back,  
the unit is again set to the recording start standby mode.  
If the RET button is held down, a maximum of 10 seconds of  
the tape is rewound and played back.  
The Rec-review function can be executed by opening the  
<SW MODE> screen from the OPERATION page and  
setting the RET SW items to the R. REVIEW via menu  
operations.  
≥In order to view these images, the OUTPUT SEL switch on  
the side panel must be set to the VTR position.  
In addition, when the FF and REW buttons are used, the  
images can be played back at different speeds by  
establishing the cue mode (PLAY + FF), review mode (PLAY  
+ REW), high-speed fast forward playback mode (FF) or  
high-speed rewind playback mode (REW).  
The RET button function can be allocated by opening the  
<USER SW> screen from the OPERATION page and  
selecting settings for the USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW and  
USER2 SW items by performing menu operations.  
29  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording  
4-1 Multi Format  
4-1-1 Video system and Recording format  
The unit employs a progressive scan (full pixel reading) CCD  
system.  
It is possible to select 11 kinds of the recording formats by  
combinations of the SYSTEM MODE item and the CAMERA  
MODE item on the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page in the setting menu.  
In any recording format, the CCD operates in progressive  
(non-interlace) scan mode.  
<Note>  
When settings for SYSTEM MODE item are changed, the  
message “TURN POWER: OFF” is displayed in the  
viewfinder screen.  
The settings for SYSTEM MODE item will change when the  
POWER switch of the unit is turned “OFF” and then turned  
“ON” again.  
O Retain the state where the POWER switch of the unit is  
turned OFF for at least 5 seconds.  
30  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-1-2 Recording format on tapes and signal format at output connector  
The format for recording signals from CCD on tape and signal formats to be output from the respective connectors are shown  
below.  
Menu setting  
O Recording on tapes  
O HD SDI signal output (VIDEO OUT connector/MON OUT connector)  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
item  
CAMERA  
MODE  
item  
Audio  
Video signals  
Time code  
User bits  
UMID information  
(ON/OFF switching is enabled.)  
1080-59.94i  
60i  
60i  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
50i  
30P Over 60i  
4
24P Over 60i (2-3 Pull-down)  
24P Over 60i (2-3-3-2 Pull-down)  
1080-50i  
50i  
25P  
60P  
30P  
24P  
50P  
25P  
25P Over 50i  
720-59.94P  
60P  
30P Over 60P  
24P Over 60P (2-3 Pull-down)  
50P  
720-50P  
25P Over 50P  
Menu setting  
SD SDI signal output  
Analog composite signal output  
(VIDEO OUT connector)  
(VIDEO OUT connector/REMOTE connector)  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
item  
CAMERA  
MODE  
item  
Audio  
Video signals  
Video signals  
EDH (Error Detect  
Handling)  
1080-59.94i  
60i  
525i  
525i  
525i  
525i  
625i  
625i  
525i  
525i  
525i  
625i  
625i  
525i  
525i  
525i  
525i  
625i  
625i  
525i  
525i  
525i  
625i  
625i  
UMID information  
(ON/OFF switching is  
enabled.)  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
50i  
(Time codes and user bits  
are not output.)  
1080-50i  
25P  
60P  
30P  
24P  
50P  
25P  
720-59.94P  
720-50P  
30P Over 60i:  
Menu setting  
O Analog HD-Y signal output (MON OUT connector)  
This operates in the interlace  
mode in 60 fields. This processes  
video signals of the same time  
into the odd field and the even  
field and records them on tape as  
video signals in the respective  
fields.  
O Analog HD signal output (VF connector)  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
item  
CAMERA  
MODE  
item  
Video signals  
1080-59.94i  
60i  
60i  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
50i  
30P Over 60i  
30P Over 60P:  
This operates in the progressive  
mode in 60 frames. This outputs  
the same video signals as video  
signals for 2 frames and records  
them on tape.  
24P Over 60i (2-3 Pull-down)  
24P Over 60i (2-3-3-2 Pull-down)  
1080-50i  
50i  
25P  
60P  
30P  
24P  
50P  
25P  
25P Over 50i  
720-59.94P  
60P  
30P Over 60P  
24P Over 60P (2-3 Pull-down)  
50P  
720-50P  
25P Over 50P  
31  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
In order to achieve images with a consistently high picture  
quality with this unit, it is necessary to adjust the black  
balance and white balance as the individual conditions  
demand. To achieve a higher picture quality, it is  
recommended that the adjustments be performed in the  
Adjust the lens aperture.  
In this case, adjusting the white balance by setting the  
signal level of white within a range between 70% and  
90% is recommended.  
4
following sequence: AWB (white balance adjustment) > ABB  
Set the AUTO W/B BAL switch to AWB, and then  
release it.  
The switch returns to the center, and the white balance  
is automatically adjusted.  
5
(black balance adjustment)  
adjustment).  
>
AWB (white balance  
4-2 Adjusting the white balance and  
black balance  
<Note>  
When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pressed again to the  
AWB side when the white balance is being adjusted  
automatically (AWB ACTIVE), the adjustment operation  
will stop.  
4-2-1 Adjusting the white balance  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
The white balance must always be re-adjusted when the  
lighting conditions have changed.  
The white balance is adjusted automatically by following the  
steps below.  
While the adjustment is in progress, the following  
message appears on the viewfinder screen.  
6
7
Set the switches as shown in the figure.  
1
CC FILTER/ND FILTER controls  
AWBACTIVE  
Adjustment is completed in several seconds. (A  
message similar to the one shown in the figure below  
now appears.)  
The adjustment value is automatically saved in the  
memory (A or B) which was set in step 1.  
AWBAOK3.2K  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
The message shown in the figure below appears when  
the color temperature of the subject falls below 2300 K  
or rises above 9900 K.  
The downward pointing arrow indicates that the color  
temperature is lower than the display temperature;  
conversely, an upward pointing arrow indicates that the it  
is higher than the display temperature.  
8
OUTPUT: CAM  
AUTO W/B BAL switch:  
Use this to execute AWB.  
GAIN: Normally 0 dB  
Set to a more suitable gain level  
if it is too dark.  
Select the CC FILTER/ND FILTER controls setting in  
accordance with the lighting conditions.  
2
3
AWBAOK2.3K  
m
<Note>  
For examples of the FILTER controls settings, refer to  
“2-3 Shooting and recording/playback function section.”  
White balance detection area  
The white balance detection area setting can be changed to  
90%, 50% or 25% by opening the <WHITE BALANCE  
MODE> screen from the OPERATION page and selecting  
the desired setting for the AWB AREA item by performing  
menu operations.  
Erect a white pattern at a place with the same conditions  
as the source of light illuminating the subject, zoom in,  
and shoot the white of the pattern on the screen. A  
white object (such as a white cloth or white wall) near  
the subject may be used as a substitute for the white  
pattern.  
The factory setting is 25%.  
The size of the white object required is shown in the  
figure below.  
90%  
50%  
<Notes>  
≥Take care to keep high-brightness spots off the screen.  
≥Shoot white objects in the center of the screen.  
25%  
At least one-fourth of the screen width  
At least one-fourth of  
the screen height  
32  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
When there is no time to adjust the white balance  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. The white balance for  
the filter is achieved in accordance with the setting position  
of the FILTER control (outer).  
When the white balance cannot be adjusted  
automatically  
When the white balance adjustment was not completed  
correctly, one of the following error messages will appear on  
the viewfinder screen. When an error message is displayed,  
take the recommended action, and try adjusting the white  
balance again. If the error message persists even after  
repeated attempts, the inside of the unit must be inspected.  
For details, contact your dealer.  
4
Messages relating to white balance adjustment  
Error  
message  
Meaning  
Recommended action  
COLOR TEMP.  
HIGH  
Color temperature is too Select a suitable filter.  
high.  
COLOR TEMP.  
LOW  
Color temperature is too Select a suitable filter.  
low.  
LOW LIGHT  
There is not enough light.  
Increase the amount of light  
or increase the gain.  
LEVEL OVER  
There is too much light.  
Reduce the amount of light  
or reduce the gain.  
CHECK FILTER The setting position of the Check the CC filter selector  
CC filter selector control is control.  
not correct.  
TIME OVER  
AWB was not completed The shooting conditions  
within the allotted time.  
may be unstable. If flicker  
occurs, engage the shutter  
and shoot again under  
stable conditions.  
White balance memories  
The values stored in the memories are retained even after  
the unit’s power has been turned off until the white balance is  
next adjusted. There are two sets of white balance  
memories, A and B.  
When ON has been selected (initial setting) as the setting for  
the FILTER INH item on the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>  
screen opened from the OPERATION page by performing  
menu operations, the number of memories is limited to one  
in A and one in B. In this case, the memory contents are not  
coupled with the CC filter.  
When FILTER INH is set to OFF, the adjustment values for  
each CC filter can be automatically saved in the memories  
corresponding to the WHITE BAL switch settings (A or B).  
This unit contains four filters so that a total of 8 (4a2)  
adjustment values are saved.  
When the S. GAIN function operates, the AWB switch is not  
activated and is the PRST value of the WHITE BAL switch.  
33  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-2-2 Adjusting the black balance  
<Notes>  
≥Check that the lens connector has been connected  
The black balance needs to be adjusted in the following  
cases:  
≥When the unit is used for the first time  
≥When the unit is used after it has not been used for a  
prolonged period of time  
and that the lens aperture is set to CLOSE.  
≥While the black balance is being adjusted, the gain  
selector circuit is switched automatically.  
Flicker or noise may appear on the viewfinder screen,  
but this is not indicative of malfunctioning.  
≥When the unit is used in an ambient temperature which has  
fluctuated significantly  
≥When the value selected for the gain switch has been  
changed  
≥If the black shading is still unsatisfactory although the  
“ABB OK” message is displayed, perform menu  
operations to open the <BLACK SHADING> screen  
from the MAINTENANCE page, move the arrow mark  
(>) to the DETECTION item, press the JOG dial  
button, and proceed with the black shading  
adjustment. If the ABB switch is held down for 8 or  
more seconds, the black shading can be automatically  
adjusted after the ABB operation. (See the SHD.ABB  
SW CTL item under “7-5-5 SW MODE.”)  
≥When the gamma ON/OFF setting has been changed  
Set the switches as shown in the figure.  
1
However, when the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G) is  
connected, automatic adjustment of the black shading  
cannot be performed even if the ABB switch is held  
down.  
≥If the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pushed down to the  
ABB position again while the black balance is being  
automatically adjusted (ABB ACTIVE), the adjustment  
will be aborted.  
The adjusted value in this case is the value before  
automatic adjustment was performed.  
≥If a lens without a lens connector is used, execute the  
auto adjustment of the black balance while the lens  
aperture is securely closed.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch:  
Use this to execute ABB.  
OUTPUT: CAM  
Black balance memory  
Set the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the ABB position, and  
then release it.  
The switch returns to the center, and the adjustment is  
performed.  
2
3
The values stored in the memory are retained even after the  
unit’s power has been turned off.  
While the adjustment is in progress, the following  
message appears on the viewfinder screen.  
ABBACTIVE  
<Note>  
While the adjustment is in progress, the lens aperture is  
automatically set to CLOSE.  
Adjustment is completed in several seconds. (A  
message similar to the one shown in the figure below  
now appears.)  
4
The adjustment value is automatically saved in the  
memory.  
ABBOK  
34  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
To use the half shutter speed (HALF)  
O For shooting images when adding effects as if taken with  
film  
4-3 Setting the electronic shutter  
This section describes the unit’s electronic shutter, its  
settings and operations.  
CAMERA  
MODE  
Video system  
Shutter speed  
1/120  
4-3-1 Shutter modes  
1080-59.94i  
1080-29.97P  
1080-23.98P  
1080-23.98PA  
720-59.94P  
720-29.97P  
720-23.98P  
1080-50i  
60i  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
60P  
30P  
24P  
50i  
1/60  
1/48  
1/48  
1/120  
1/60  
1/48  
1/100  
1/50  
1/100  
1/50  
The table below lists the shutter modes in which the unit’s  
electronic shutter can be used as well as the shutter speeds  
which can be selected.  
4
To use the fixed shutter speed  
O For eliminating flicker due to lighting  
O For shooting fast moving subjects clearly  
CAMERA  
Video system  
Shutter speed  
MODE  
1080-25P  
25P  
50P  
25P  
1080-59.94i  
1080-29.97P  
1080-23.98P  
1080-23.98PA  
720-59.94P  
720-29.97P  
720-23.98P  
1080-50i  
60i  
720-50P  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
60P  
30P  
24P  
50i  
720-25P  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
HALF  
<Notes>  
O No matter in which mode the electronic shutter is used,  
the higher the shutter speed, the lower the camera’s  
sensitivity.  
O When the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will  
increasingly open and the depth of focus will become  
shallower as the shutter speed is increased.  
1/60, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
HALF  
1080-25P  
25P  
50P  
25P  
720-50P  
720-25P  
To use the shutter speed of SYNCRO SCAN  
O For shooting monitor screens in a way that minimizes the  
pattern of horizontal lines  
O For shooting images when adding effects to the subjects’  
movement  
CAMERA  
MODE  
Video system  
Variable range  
1080-59.94i  
1080-29.97P  
1080-23.98P  
1080-23.98PA  
720-59.94P  
720-29.97P  
720-23.98P  
1080-50i  
60i  
1/60.3 to 1/249.8  
1/30.2 to 1/249.8  
1/24.1 to 1/249.8  
1/24.1 to 1/249.8  
1/60.3 to 1/249.8  
1/30.2 to 1/249.8  
1/24.1 to 1/249.8  
1/50.2 to 1/209.5  
1/25.2 to 1/209.5  
1/50.2 to 1/209.5  
1/25.2 to 1/209.5  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
60P  
30P  
24P  
50i  
1080-25P  
25P  
50P  
25P  
720-50P  
720-25P  
35  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-3-2 Setting the shutter mode and speed  
Press the SHUTTER switch to the SEL position again,  
and repeat this until the desired mode or speed is  
displayed.  
When all the modes and speeds are displayed, the  
display will change in the sequence shown below.  
2
The shutter speeds used in the shutter mode are set by  
switching the SHUTTER switch.  
The shutter speeds in the SYNCHRO SCAN mode can  
easily be changed using the SYNCHRO SCAN (+ and –)  
buttons on the side panel.  
Standard mode  
Open the <SHUTTER SPEED> screen and <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen from the OPERATION page by performing  
menu operations. It is now possible to restrict the shutter  
speed selection range to the required range beforehand  
and/or select whether to use the SYNCHRO SCAN mode  
and SUPER V mode beforehand.  
POSITION  
1
POSITION  
2
POSITION  
3
POSITION  
4
POSITION  
5
POSITION  
6
SYNCHRO SCAN  
mode  
Once selected, the shutter speed is retained even after the  
unit’s power has been turned off.  
Viewfinder screen displays relating to the shutter  
For details, refer to “4-7 Viewfinder screen status displays.”  
#
< SHUTTER SPEED >  
SYNCHRO SCAN :ON  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
4-3-3 Setting the synchro scan mode  
Proceed with operation by following the steps below.  
Press the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL to establish  
the SYNCHRO SCAN mode.  
1
#
< SHUTTER SELECT >  
POSITION1 SEL :1/60  
POSITION2 SEL :1/120  
POSITION3 SEL :1/250  
POSITION4 SEL :1/500  
POSITION5 SEL :1/1000  
POSITION6 SEL :1/2000  
Press the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL.  
1
SHUTTER switch  
SYNCHRO SCAN (+ and –) buttons  
In the SYNCHRO SCAN mode, it is possible to change  
the shutter speed continuously by operating the  
SYNCHRO SCAN (+ and –) buttons.  
2
SHUTTER switch  
36  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-4-2 Adjusting the audio signal recording  
4-4 Selecting the audio input signals  
and adjusting their recording  
levels  
levels  
The procedure for manually adjusting the levels at which the  
signals are to be recorded on audio tracks CH1 and CH2 is  
set forth below.  
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is set to AUTO,  
the recording levels on audio tracks CH1 and CH2 are  
adjusted automatically. On the other hand, when it is set to  
MAN, the levels can be adjusted manually. The recording  
levels on audio tracks CH3 and CH4 can be selected using  
the menu.  
Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to the CH1/2 position  
1
so that the audio level meter display in the display  
window indicates CH1 and CH2, and check that 1 and 2  
are actually indicated as the display in the display  
window. Before proceeding any further, on the menu,  
set whether to activate the F.AUDIO LEVEL controls  
which are used for attenuation. (At the factory, the mode  
in which these controls are inactive is established.)  
4
4-4-1 Selecting the audio input signals  
Use the AUDIO IN switch to select the input signals to be  
recorded on audio tracks CH1, CH2, CH3 and CH4.  
For details, refer to “2-2 Audio function section.”  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 buttons to MAN  
(manual).  
2
Display window  
While monitoring the audio level meter in the display  
3
window or the audio level meter display inside the  
viewfinder, adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2  
controls. If the uppermost bar (0 dB) is exceeded, the  
“OVER” display lights up to indicate that the input  
volume is too high. The level must be adjusted so that 0  
dB will not be indicated even under maximum volume  
conditions.  
MONITOR  
CH1/3OSTOCH2/4  
selector switch  
Audio level meter in display window  
OVER  
NDF SLAVE HOLD  
GPS  
0
MONITOR SELECT  
CH1/2OCH3/4 switch  
CTL VTCG TIME DATE P-iREC  
AUDIO LEVEL  
10  
20  
30  
CH1, CH2 controls  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH1, CH2 buttons  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
B
F
TAPE  
BATT  
For the detailed audio-related settings, open the  
<MIC/AUDIO1> and <MIC/AUDIO2> screens from the VTR  
MENU page and select the settings for the items by  
performing menu operations.  
40  
OO  
-dB  
1
2
For details, refer to “Chapter 7 Menu description tables.”  
Audio level meter display inside viewfinder  
#
< MIC/AUDIO1 >  
F:1----∫  
FRONT VR CH1  
FRONT VR CH2  
MIC LOWCUT CH1  
MIC LOWCUT CH2  
MIC LOWCUT CH3  
MIC LOWCUT CH4  
LIMITER CH1  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:ON  
R:2----∫---+  
For the audio levels to be adjusted by one person only, it is  
recommended that the F.AUDIO LEVEL controls be used.  
Select in advance the audio channels whose levels are to be  
adjusted, and while monitoring the level meter on the  
viewfinder screen, adjust the F.AUDIO LEVEL controls in  
such a way that the input will not be too high.  
LIMITER CH2  
AUTO LEVEL CH3  
AUTO LEVEL CH4  
CUE REC SELECT  
TEST TONE  
:ON  
:CH1  
:NORMAL  
#
< MIC/AUDIO2 >  
FRONT MIC POWER  
REAR MIC POWER  
MONITOR SELECT  
FRONT MIC LEVEL  
REAR MIC CH1 LVL  
REAR MIC CH2 LVL  
REAR LINE IN LVL  
AUDIO OUT LVL  
HEADROOM  
:ON  
:ON  
:STEREO  
:–40dB  
:–60dB  
:–60dB  
:0dB  
:0dB  
:18dB  
:OFF  
WIRELESS WARN  
37  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-4-3 CH3 and CH4 recording levels  
4-5 Setting the time data  
Audio signals can be recorded separately for four audio  
channels. Perform menu operations to open the <MIC/  
AUDIO1> screen from the VTR MENU page to change the  
settings for the AUTO LEVEL CH3 and AUTO LEVEL CH4.  
Depending on the setting conditions and input level for these  
items, recording levels for audio tracks CH3 and CH4  
change as shown in the table below. Note that adjustments  
cannot be performed manually.  
When the user bits and time code are both to be used, the  
user bits are set first.  
If the time code is set first, the time code generator will stop  
while the user bits are being set so that the time code setting  
will be off.  
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00 to  
23:59:59:29.  
4-5-1 Setting the user bits  
Input level  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH3/CH4*  
LINE  
MIC  
By setting the user bits, information, such as a memorandum  
(date, time) of up to 8 digits in hexadecimal numbers, can be  
recorded in the sub-code area (LTC) and the VIDEO AUX  
area (VITC).  
ON  
AGC ON  
AGC ON  
OFF  
AGC/LIMITER OFF  
LIMITER ON  
<Note>  
The DVCPRO HD-LP format allows signals for 8 audio  
channels to be recorded, but the same signals as CH1, CH2,  
CH3 and CH4 will be recorded for CH5, CH6, CH7 and CH8,  
respectively.  
DISPLAY switch  
Display window  
TCG switch  
DOWN (–) button  
UP (+) button  
SHIFT button  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch  
Set the DISPLAY switch to UB.  
1
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
2
Set the user bits using the SHIFT button, UP (+) button  
and DOWN (–) button.  
3
SHIFT button:  
This is used to cause the digit that is  
to be set to flash. Each time it is  
pressed, the flashing digit moves to  
the right.  
UP (+) button:  
This increments the numerical value  
of the flashing digit by 1.  
DOWN (–) button: This decrements the numerical value  
of the flashing digit by 1.  
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN or R-RUN.  
4
38  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
O When the recording format is 720-50P or 720-59.94P,  
O To record the user bits of LTC, open the <TC/UB>  
screen from the VTR MENU page by performing  
menu operations and select “USER” in the UB MODE  
item.  
(When the recording format is 720-50P or 720-  
59.94P, set the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch to the  
“BARS” position in order to record the user bits of  
LTC in a mode for recording built-in color bar signals.)  
O To record the user bits of VITC, select “USER/EXT” in  
the VITC UB MODE item.  
5
operations where FRM RATE or REGEN is selected in the  
UB MODE item will be the same when USER is selected.  
Furthermore, operations where TIME is selected in the  
VITC UB MODE item will be the same when FRM RATE  
or REGEN is selected.  
O When only the upper 6 digits of the user bits can be  
recorded, the remaining lower 2 digits are not recorded. In  
this case, the user setting value and the lower 2 digits of  
the time code generator that are selected in the UB  
MODE item and VITC UB MODE item cannot be  
recorded.  
4
<Notes>  
User bit memory function  
O The time code/user bits are also recorded in the VIDEO  
AUX area of the unit’s memory.  
The user bit settings (except for the actual time) are  
automatically saved in the memory and retained even after  
the power is turned off.  
The time code (VITC) is the same value as the sub code  
area’s time code (LTC). The user bits (VITC user bits)  
can be selected by menu operations using the VITC UB  
MODE item on the <TC/UB> screen which is accessed  
from the VTR MENU page, and it can be used for different  
applications from the LTC.  
Tape continuity with the user bits  
O The number of digits that can record user bits may vary  
with the recording format.  
(Only when the recording format is 1080-50i or 1080-59.94i)  
Selecting REGEN for the UB MODE item on the <TC/UB>  
screen by performing menu operations will call up the user  
bits recorded on the tape, making it possible to continue  
recording from that value. However, it is not possible to  
record the contents that were set.  
When the recording format is 1080-50i or 1080-59.94i  
CAMERA  
User bits  
MODE  
All 8 digits can be recorded  
LTC UB (In accordance with the settings in the UB  
Camera shooting information  
MODE item)  
In the unit, the frame rate information (camera shooting  
mode) indicating the shooting rate and the active frame  
information (update frame information) indicating the first  
frame of which frame images are switched are automatically  
stored as the camera’s shooting information into the user bits  
of LTC (when the recording format is 720-50P or 720-  
59.94P) or the user bits of VITC (when the recording format  
is 1080-59.94i and the video method is 24P or 24PA).  
These kinds of information will be output from the TC OUT  
connector rather than recorded on tape. It will also be  
overlaid with the HD SDI signals output from the MON OUT  
connector and VIDEO OUT connector.  
24P  
24PA  
Camera shooting information is recorded  
automatically.  
VITC UB  
All 8 digits can be recorded  
LTC UB (In accordance with the settings in the UB  
60i  
50i  
30P  
25P  
MODE item)  
All 8 digits can be recorded  
VITC UB (In accordance with the settings in the  
VITC UB MODE item)  
When the recording format is 720-50P or 720-59.94P  
The active frame information (update frame information) is  
stored in the lowest digit of the user bits, while the frame rate  
information (camera shooting mode) is stored in the lower  
3rd and 4th digits. To store the camera shooting information  
into the user bits of LTC and the user bits of VITC in other  
shooting modes, open the <TC/UB> screen from the VTR  
MENU page by performing menu operations and select  
“FRM RATE” in the UB MODE item and the VITC UB MODE  
item.  
OUTPUT/AUTO  
KNEE switch  
CAMERA MODE:  
60P/50P/30P/25P/24P  
Upper 6 digits can be recorded.  
LTC UB (In accordance with the settings in the UB  
MODE item)  
BARS  
(Built-in color  
bar signals)  
Upper 6 digits can be recorded.  
VITC UB (In accordance with the settings in the  
VITC UB MODE item)  
User bits information is recorded  
automatically.  
LTC UB  
CAM  
(Camera video  
image signals)  
Upper 6 digits can be recorded.  
VITC UB (In accordance with the settings in the  
VITC UB MODE item)  
39  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
How to store the camera shooting information into user bits  
When the recording format is 1080-50i or 1080-59.94i  
User bits of VITC (or LTC)  
SYSTEM MODE/  
CAMERA MODE  
User bits  
Select “FRM RATE” in the UB  
MODE item.  
LTC UB  
VITC UB  
LTC UB  
VITC UB  
LTC UB  
24P  
24PA  
1080-59.94i  
¢¢:04:24:8  
¢
Auto  
Tape management information  
≥Updated frame information  
≥REC START/STOP mark  
Fixed  
value  
Select “FRM RATE” in the UB  
MODE item.  
60i  
50i  
30P  
25P  
Checking  
1080-50i  
1080-59.94i  
information for  
the 6 digits at  
right.  
Select “FRM RATE” in the  
VITC UB MODE item.  
Camera shooting mode  
Sequence No.  
24P, 24PA:  
0 to 4  
60i:  
600  
308  
248  
24C  
502  
25A  
30P:  
24P:  
24PA:  
50i:  
60P  
50P  
30P  
25P  
24P  
Auto  
In all other modes:  
Fixed at F  
720-50P  
720-59.94P  
The  
information  
automatically.  
VITC  
user  
is recorded  
bits  
VITC UB  
25P:  
Frame rate: 24P Over 60i (2:3)  
Starting field for the updated  
frame  
Time code frame digit  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Image  
•••  
Ao Ae Bo Be BoCeCoDeDoDeAo Ae Bo Be  
CoDeDoDeAo Ae Bo Be BoCeCoDeDoDe  
Sequence No.  
•••  
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information  
•••  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
10  
01  
00  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
Frame rate: 24PA Over 60i (2:3:3:2)  
Time code frame digit  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Image  
•••  
Ao Ae Bo Be BoCeCoCeDoDe Ao Ae Bo Be  
CoCeDoDe Ao Ae Bo Be BoCeCoCeDoDe  
Sequence No.  
•••  
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information  
•••  
10  
10  
01  
00  
10  
10  
10  
00  
10  
10  
10  
01  
00  
10  
Frame rate: 30P Over 60i (2:2)  
25P Over 50i (2:2)  
Time code frame digit  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
Image  
•••  
Ao Ae Bo Be CoCe  
Updated frame information  
•••  
10  
10  
10  
40  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
When the recording format is 720-50P or 720-59.94P  
VITC user bits  
LTC user bits  
OWhen the internal colour bar signals are being  
User bits setting  
recorded  
Tape management information  
LTC user bits verification information  
User bits setting  
0 1 : 1 2 : 0 1 : x x  
Frame frequency  
4: 50.00 Hz  
5: 59.94 Hz  
4
To verify the VITC user bits, set the DISPLAY switch to  
UB, and hold down the HOLD button.  
While the HOLD button is held down, the VITC user bits  
information appears on the counter display.  
Tape management information  
OActive frame information  
OREC START/STOP mark  
0 1 : 1 2 : 0 1 : 5 0  
<Reference>  
The table below shows the correlation between the active  
frame rate and time code in the 24P, 25P, 30P and 50P  
modes.  
OWhen the camera’s video signals are being  
recorded  
Recorded frame number count  
An estimated calculation of the number of recorded  
frames will be displayed.  
Frame rate: 24P Over 60P (2:3)  
Active frame  
When the frame rate has been set to 24 fps and  
recording has been performed for 10 seconds,  
“0240” will be displayed as the count.  
When recording is started, the count is reset to  
“0000,” and the number of recorded frames per cut is  
counted up to “9999.”  
Time code frame digit  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Image  
•••  
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
<Note>  
Active frame information  
When the PRE RECORDING function is turned ON,  
the number of frames recorded in the pre-recording  
operation is not counted.  
•••  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
10  
01  
00  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
Frame rate: 30P Over 60P (2:2)  
25P Over 50P (2:2)  
Time code frame digit  
Frame rate information  
24 fps  
•••  
00  
01  
02  
(23.98 fps)  
Image  
•••  
A
A
B
B
C
C
Frame frequency  
4: 50.00 Hz  
5: 59.94 Hz  
Active frame information  
•••  
10  
10  
10  
Tape management information  
OActive frame information  
OREC START/STOP mark  
0 2 : 4 0 : 2 4 : 5 0  
41  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Time difference  
00:00  
Region  
Greenwich  
Time difference  
– 00:30  
– 01:30  
– 02:30  
– 03:30  
– 04:30  
– 05:30  
– 06:30  
– 07:30  
– 08:30  
– 09:30  
– 10:30  
– 11:30  
+ 11:30  
+ 10:30  
+ 09:30  
+ 08:30  
+ 07:30  
+ 06:30  
+ 05:30  
+ 04:30  
+ 03:30  
+ 02:30  
+ 01:30  
+ 00:30  
+ 12:45  
Region  
4-5-2 Setting the internal clock’s date and  
time  
Azores  
– 01:00  
– 02:00  
– 03:00  
– 04:00  
– 05:00  
– 06:00  
– 07:00  
– 08:00  
– 09:00  
– 10:00  
– 11:00  
– 12:00  
+ 13:00  
+ 12:00  
+ 11:00  
+ 10:00  
+ 09:00  
+ 08:00  
+ 07:00  
+ 06:00  
+ 05:00  
+ 04:00  
+ 03:00  
+ 02:00  
+ 01:00  
The unit’s internal clock is not set to the correct date and  
time when shipped from the factory.  
Before using the unit, set the date and time.  
Mid-Atlantic  
Buenos Aires  
Halifax  
New Foundland  
New York  
Chicago  
Set the DISPLAY switch to UB.  
1
Denver  
Press the HOLD button to cause DATE to be displayed  
in the display window.  
2
Los Angeles  
Alaska  
Marquesas Islands  
Hawaii  
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
3
Midway Island  
Kwajalein  
Norfork Island  
Lord Howe Island  
Darwin  
Set the date (year/month/day) using the SHIFT button,  
UP (+) button and DOWN (–) button.  
4
New Zealand  
Solomon Islands  
Guam  
Press the HOLD button to cause TIME to be displayed in  
the display window.  
5
Tokyo  
Rangoon  
Bombay  
Kabul  
Set the time (hour/minutes/seconds) using the SHIFT  
button, UP (+) button and DOWN (–) button.  
6
Beijing  
Bangkok  
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN or R-RUN. The internal  
clock starts marking time as soon as the switch position  
is changed.  
Dhaka  
Tehran  
7
Islamabad  
Abu Dhabi  
Moscow  
Press the HOLD button to cause TIME ZONE (difference  
from the world standard time) to be displayed in the  
display window.  
8
Eastern Europe  
Central Europe  
Chatham Island  
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
<Notes>  
9
≥After the date has been set in step 4, the internal clock  
starts marking the time as soon as the switch position has  
been changed even when the TCG switch is set to F-RUN  
or R-RUN.  
To cancel the setting in the course of setting the date, time  
or time zone, set the TCG switch to F-RUN or R-RUN while  
holding down the SHIFT button.  
≥The clock is accurate to a monthly error of approximately  
+/– 30 seconds in the power OFF status. If a more  
accurate time reading is required, check the time and set it  
again when the power is turned on.  
If the date or time display has deviated from the local time,  
the time zone setting may be off. Check the time zone  
setting again. (There is no need to set the date and time  
again.)  
Set the time difference (hour/minutes) and whether it is  
10  
ahead (no display) or behind (“–” display) the world  
standard time using the UP (+) button or DOWN (–)  
button.  
Example: When the time difference is 5 hours behind  
(New York)  
Set “05:00 –”.  
The time zone is always stored along with the date and  
time in the memory as memo data. While referring to  
the table on the right, set whatever applies to the local  
time.  
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN or R-RUN to fix the time  
zone.  
11  
42  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-5-3 Setting the time code  
4-5-4 Externally locking the time code  
The unit’s internal time code generator can be locked to an  
external generator. In addition, the time code generator of  
an external VTR can be locked to the unit’s internal  
generator.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
1
Set the TCG switch to SET.  
2
Example of connections for external locking  
Open the <TC UB> screen from the VTR MENU page by  
3
As the figure shows, connect both the reference video signal  
and reference time code.  
performing menu operations, and select DF or NDF as  
the TC MODE item setting. To advance the time code in  
the drop frame mode, select DF; to advance it in the  
non-drop frame mode, select NDF.  
4
Example 1: When locking onto an external signal  
<Note>  
The switching function between “NDF” and “DF” is  
enabled when the system frequency of the unit is set to  
59.94 Hz.  
TC IN  
Reference  
time code  
When the system frequency is set to 50 Hz, it always  
advances the time code in the non-drop frame mode.  
Reference  
GENLOCK IN  
video signal  
Set the time code using the SHIFT button, UP (+) button  
and DOWN (–) button.  
4
<Note>  
Select the TCG switch position.  
In place of the HD Y reference signal, composite video  
5
Select “F-RUN” to advance the time code in the free-run  
mode or select “R-RUN” to advance it in the rec-run  
mode.  
signals can be input as the reference video signal.  
To regenerate the time code as the value on the  
tape and record continuously  
When the TCG switch is constantly set to R-RUN position,  
the time code is regenerated as the time code value on the  
tape that was already recorded when starting the recording  
on the tape, so that the time code is recorded continuously.  
(When the FIRST REC TC item is set to the REGEN)  
<Notes>  
O If the TCG switch is set to the SET or F-RUN position  
before recording, the recording starts with the time code  
of the set value when starting the recording regardless of  
the value on the tape.  
O After recording once, the unit returns to the state where  
the time code is regenerated as the value on the tape.  
O When the power is turned off, the unit returns to the state  
where the time code is regenerated as the value on the  
tape. (When the TCG SET HOLD item is set to the OFF)  
O When the TCG switch is set to the SET or the F-RUN  
position once and then to R-RUN, the unit returns to the  
state where the time code is regenerated as the value on  
the tape by executing the jump function. For details, refer  
to “3-3 Scene-to-scene continuity.”  
Time code when the battery is replaced  
The backup function works even when the battery is  
replaced, and the time code generator continues to operate  
for a prolonged duration (approx. 1 year).  
<Note>  
If the POWER switch is turned on, then off, and then on  
again, the free-run time code backup accuracy is  
approximately 2 frames.  
43  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Example 2: When connecting a multiple number of units and  
In the unit, there is a video signal delay in the camera, which  
using one of them as the reference unit  
is required or the process of converting video images taken  
with the image-shooting element from the progressive  
signals to the interlace signals. Since time is required for  
making the 2:3 pull-down from the 24P frame, there is a  
video signal delay in the camera. When recording from a  
device that can record images without a delay and the unit is  
connected in parallel, it is necessary to synchronize the time  
code. To set this timing, open the <TC UB> screen from the  
VTR MENU page and set it in the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item.  
Set by referring to the connection example.  
TC OUT  
MON OUT (HD-Y)  
Reference unit  
or  
VIDEO OUT (VBS)  
TC IN  
Setting of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item  
GENLOCK IN  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
TC OUT  
TC VIDEO  
SYNCRO  
0
1
2
3
For setting to correct the time code  
according to the delay of video signals.  
0: Do not correct.  
1: To delay the time code to be input  
according to the timing of the video  
images.  
MON OUT (HD-Y)  
or  
VIDEO OUT (VBS)  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
2: To forward the time code to be output  
according to the timing of the video  
images.  
3: To delay the time code to be input and  
forward the time code to be output,  
respectively, according to the timing of  
the video images.  
MON OUT (HD-Y)  
TC OUT  
or  
VIDEO OUT (VBS)  
To the next camera  
<Note>  
Example 3:  
The system can be configured with multiple units by opening  
the <GENLOCK> screen from the SYSTEM SETTING page  
and setting the GL PHASE item to the connector using menu  
operations.  
The phase of the time code can correspond to either the HD-  
Y output signals of the MON OUT connector or VBS output  
signals of the VIDEO OUT connector. However, the same  
value should commonly be set to the GL PHASE for all  
cameras. If different values coexist in the system, the  
shooting timing may not correspond to each other.  
When the unit and an external device are locked to the  
external time code generator, which is connected externally,  
and when simultaneous recording is made by using the TC  
OUT output signals.  
Reference video signal  
External time code generator  
TCG  
TC OUT  
Reference video signal  
MON OUT (HD-Y)  
Setting of GL PHASE  
HD SDI  
Device that records images without a delay  
TC IN  
DAT  
VIDEO OUT (VBS)  
COMPOSIT  
Setting of GL PHASE  
AJ-HDX900  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 1  
GL PHASE  
HD SDI  
COMPOSIT  
For selecting the output signals that lock  
phases to the signals that are input in the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
HD SDI:  
For locking the HD SDI signals to the  
GENLOCK input.  
For the down converter output signals,  
the start position of the video delays by  
about 90 lines.  
TC OUT  
TC IN  
MON OUT  
or  
VTR etc.  
VIDEO OUT  
COMPOSIT:  
For locking the down converter output  
signals to the GENLOCK input.  
For the HD SDI output signals, the start  
position of the video gains by about 90  
lines.  
VIDEO IN  
SDI IN  
HD SDI IN  
REF IN  
44  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Example 4:  
Example 5:  
When the unit and an external device are locked to the  
external time code generator, which is connected externally,  
and when several units of the camera are connected in a  
cascade configuration.  
When an external device is locked to the time code  
generator of the unit.  
Reference video signal  
To be connected if necessary  
Reference video signal  
TCG  
External time code generator  
TC OUT  
4
TCG  
TC OUT  
AJ-HDX900  
Device that records images without a delay  
TC IN  
DAT  
Settings of the TC  
TC IN  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 3  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
A device that synchronizes with the TC IN  
input and capable to record without delay  
(DAT etc.)  
1st unit  
AJ-HDX900  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 1  
TC IN  
DAT  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
2nd unit and later  
AJ-HDX900  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 0  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
AJ-HDX900  
TC IN  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 0  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
45  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Example 6:  
Operating procedure for external locking  
When an external device is locked to the time code  
generator of this unit, which is connected in a cascade  
configuration.  
Follow the steps below for external locking.  
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
1
Reference video signal  
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN.  
2
To be connected if necessary  
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
3
TCG  
TC OUT  
Supply the reference time code and reference video  
4
signal, which are in a phase relationship that satisfies  
the time code standard, to the TC IN connector and  
GENLOCK IN connector respectively.  
1st unit  
AJ-HDX900  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 1  
TC IN  
The built-in time code generator is now locked to the  
reference time code.  
About 10 seconds after locking, the external lock status will  
be retained even if the connection of the externally supplied  
reference time code is disconnected. However, the servo  
lock will be subject to disturbances if it is connected or  
disconnected during recording.  
O When the power of the unit is turned off, the time code is  
unlocked.  
O The accuracy of the time code is 20 seconds a month.  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
From the 2nd unit to the  
(n–1)-th unit  
AJ-HDX900  
AJ-HDX900  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 0  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
<Note>  
n-th unit  
When the external lock operation is performed, the time code  
is instantly locked to the external time code, and the same  
value as the external code value appears on the counter  
display. Do not set the unit to the recording mode during the  
few seconds it takes for the sync generator to stabilize.  
TC IN  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCRO item: 2  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
A device that synchronizes with the TC IN  
input and capable to record without delay  
(such as DAT or a camera recorder)  
Concerning the user bits setting during external  
lock  
When the unit’s time code is externally locked, only the time  
data is locked to the time data of the time code supplied from  
the external source. This means that the user bits can be set  
separately for each component.  
TC IN  
DAT  
When the <TC/UB> screen is opened from the VTR menu  
page and EXT is selected as the UB MODE item setting by  
performing menu operations, the user bits can also be locked  
to the user bits of the time code supplied from the external  
source.  
To release the external lock  
First stop supplying the external time code, and set the TCG  
switch to R-RUN.  
46  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
When switching the power from the battery to an  
external power supply while the time code is  
4-5-5 Setting the UMID information  
This unit supports metadata UMIDs. As the UMID data, the  
user must first set the name of his or her country (with 3 or  
fewer characters), the name of the company or organization  
(with 4 or fewer characters), and the user name (with 4 or  
externally locked  
In order to ensure the continuity of the time code generator’s  
power, connect the external power supply to the DC IN  
socket, and then remove the battery pack. If the battery  
pack is removed first, no guarantees can be made for the  
continuity of the external locking of the time code.  
fewer characters). Input the name of the country based on  
(21)  
the Country Codes  
standard.  
stipulated under the ISO 3166  
Given here as an example is the procedure for inputting the  
user name.  
Gen-locking of the camera unit while the time code  
is externally locked  
4
21 Examples:  
CHN for China, USA for United States, CAN for Canada, and JPN for  
Japan  
While the time code is externally locked, the camera unit is  
gen-locked by the reference video signal which is supplied to  
the GENLOCK IN connector.  
< UMID SET/INFO >  
--OWNER--  
<Notes>  
COUNTRY  
ORGANIZATION :****  
USER :****  
:***  
O When the signal from the unit’s HD SDI connector is to be  
used as the reference video signal, first set the OUTPUT  
SEL switch on the side panel to the CAM position.  
O It takes time to synchronize GEN LOCK. Please do not  
record or do any other operations until synchronization is  
finished (approx. 10 sec.).  
#
**DEVICE NODE**  
Open the <UMID SET/INFO> screen from the VTR  
menu page by performing a menu operation.  
1
2
3
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the “USER” item.  
Press the JOG dial button to switch the screen to the  
character entry mode.  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is  
switched in the following sequence:  
Space: ∑  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
<Note>  
Only spaces and letters can be selected for the  
COUNTRY item. This does not apply to other items.  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
5
6
7
Turn the JOG dial button to set the following characters.  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
returns to the “USER” item.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
8
47  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-6 Menu displays on the viewfinder screen  
4-6-1 Menu configuration  
4-6-2 Basic menu operations  
USER MENU:  
Menu items are selected and entered using the MENU  
button and JOG dial button. The menus have a hierarchical  
configuration consisting of the main menu, sub menus and  
setting item menus.  
The data which has been set is written and saved in a non-  
volatile memory.  
The operations performed for the MAIN MENU are described  
here but the operating procedure is the same for the other  
menus as well except for the screen displays.  
Although USER MENU is set at the factory, the user may  
perform menu operations to open the <USER MENU  
SELECT> screen from the MAIN MENU page, select the  
settings for its items in accordance with the purpose of  
operation and setting frequency and configure a menu  
tailored to individual needs.  
This menu appears when the MENU button is pressed.  
MAIN MENU:  
This enables all the items on the setting menus to be set.  
It can be organized hierarchically by category in  
accordance with the purpose of operation and setting  
frequency. It appears when the MENU button is pressed  
for 3 or more seconds.  
Press the MENU button for 3 or more seconds.  
The menu screen consisting of items organized on a  
category by category basis now appears.  
1
#
**** MAIN MENU ****  
OPTION MENU:  
SYSTEM SETTING  
PAINT  
VF  
OPERATION  
FILE  
MAINTENANCE  
VTR MENU  
This menu is provided to accommodate the functions that  
may be added in the future. It appears when the MENU  
button is pressed while the LIGHT button is held down.  
USER MENU SELECT  
SYSTEM SETTING:  
This item is used when deciding on the unit’s  
recording signals, recording system, etc.  
PAINT:  
This item is used when detailed image adjustments  
are to be made while a waveform monitor is used to  
monitor the camera’s output waveforms. Video  
engineer support is normally required for this. The  
items under this sub menu can also be set using an  
external remote control unit, but they are valid only  
when the unit is used on its own.  
VF:  
This item is used for selecting what is to be displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
OPERATION:  
This item is used to change settings in accordance  
with the subject conditions and other factors, usually  
when the unit is operated by the cameraman.  
FILE:  
This item is used to read and write the setup card  
data and perform the lens file and other file-related  
operations.  
MAINTENANCE:  
This item is used to perform the maintenance and  
inspections related to this unit’s camera unit.  
VTR MENU:  
This item is used to perform the maintenance and  
inspections related to this unit’s VTR unit.  
USER MENU SELECT:  
This item is used for editing the USER MENU.  
48  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
To increment the value  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the item which is to be set, and the sub menu screen  
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed.  
2
Turn the JOG dial button in the clockwise direction as  
viewed from the front of the camera.  
**** MAIN MENU ****  
To decrement the value  
SYSTEM SETTING  
Turn the JOG dial button in the counterclockwise  
direction as viewed from the front of the camera.  
Each time the button is turned, the number changes by  
one increment. When it is turned quickly, the number  
changes quickly, and when it is turned slowly, the setting  
can be adjusted finely.  
PAINT  
VF  
OPERATION  
FILE  
MAINTENANCE  
VTR MENU  
#
USER MENU SELECT  
4
To set an item to ON or OFF  
To set an item to ON, turn the JOG dial button in the  
clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the  
camera. Conversely, to set an item to OFF, turn the  
button in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from  
the front of the camera.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the item which is to be set, and the setting item menu  
screen appears when the JOG dial button is pressed.  
3
4
5
< OPERATION >  
Press the JOG dial button.  
The setting stops flashing, and the setting is entered.  
CAMERA ID  
6
7
8
SHUTTER SPEED  
SHUTTER SELECT  
USER SW  
#
SW MODE  
To change another setting item on the same page,  
repeat steps 4 to 6.  
WHITE BALANCE MODE  
USER SW GAIN  
IRIS  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
The menu setting mode is exited, and operation returns  
to the normal operation mode.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the item which is to be set, and the item’s setting flashes  
when the JOG dial button is pressed.  
4-6-3 Selecting the user menus  
By performing menu operations, open the USER MENU  
SELECT page from the MAIN MENU and then open the  
setting item menu screens, and select only those items  
required on the USER MENU.  
Only the items which have been set are displayed as the  
USER MENU items. For details on operation, refer to “4-6-2  
Basic menu operations.”  
< USER SW >  
#
USER MAIN SW  
USER1 SW  
USER2 SW  
:S.GAIN  
:PRE REC  
:DS.GAIN  
< USER MENU SELECT >  
(SELECT MODE)  
SYSTEM SETTING  
PAINT  
#
VF  
OPERATION  
FILE  
MAINTENANCE  
VTR MENU  
Turn the JOG dial button to change the setting.  
<Note>  
Setting items are effective when “¢” is displayed. However,  
the maximum number of items that can be set is 42 in the  
case of camera related items (3 pages’ worth, with 14 items  
per page, 14 a 3 = 42) or 14 in the case of VTR related  
items (1 page’s worth, or 14 items).  
49  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-7-2 Viewfinder screen status display  
4-7 Viewfinder screen status  
displays  
configuration  
All the items that can be displayed are laid out inside the  
viewfinder as shown in the figure below.  
Not only the images but the lamps and characters indicating  
the unit’s settings and operation statuses as well as the  
messages, center and safety zone markers, camera ID and  
other information are displayed inside the viewfinder.  
L
3
4
5
6
2
1
8
7
24PA  
1080 DRS  
-- GAIN -- -- USER SW GAIN --  
3
1/249.8  
∑10min REC14.6V  
/34min DIONIC90  
4-7-1 Viewfinder lamp displays  
LOW : 0  
MID :12  
HIGH:18  
S.GAIN:30/36  
9
1
:
:
:
:
DS.GAIN: 6 /10 /12  
:
/15 /20  
TALLY / REC  
:
;
UM:S.GAIN 30dB  
U1:AUDIO CH1  
C
:
U2:DS.GAIN 12  
REC WARNING  
M
K
J
COMP  
iREC  
D
:
<
=
>
EX  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
∫
3.2K 12 M F:1---- ---+ BS 23h59m  
∫
1A A 18dB  
F:2---- ---+ ++F5.6 Z99  
?@  
B
A
E
FHG I  
Viewfinder pictured here is the AJ-  
BATT  
For details, refer to the following pages.  
HVF21G.  
SAVE  
(For details concerning viewfinder,  
refer to the operating instructions  
of each viewfinder.)  
2
3
4
4-7-3 Selecting the viewfinder screen  
display items  
1 TALLY/REC (recording) lamp  
This lights up (red) during recording. It flashes when a  
To select which items are to be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen, perform menu operations to open the <VF  
INDICATOR1> screen or <VF INDICATOR2> screen from  
the VF page, and select ON or OFF for the display or select  
the type desired for each item concerned.  
problem has occurred.  
appropriate section in “6-3 Warning system.”  
For details, refer to the  
2
(abnormal operating status warning) lamp  
This lights when the unit is set to an abnormal operating  
status for any of the items set to “ON” on the “!LED”  
screen of the setting menu.  
For details on operation, refer to “4-6-2 Basic menu  
operations.”  
For details on selecting the items which are to be  
#
< VF INDICATOR1 >  
indicated with the  
lamp, refer to the <!LED> screen  
items in “Chapter 7 Menu description tables.”  
EXTENDER  
SHUTTER  
FILTER  
WHITE  
GAIN  
IRIS  
CAMERA ID :BAR  
ID POSITION :UPPER L  
DATE/TIME :OFF  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:S+IRIS  
3 BATT (battery) lamp  
This starts flashing when the battery voltage has dropped  
to the level where the battery will no longer be usable in  
several minutes’ time, and it lights when the battery is no  
ZOOM LVL  
:ON  
longer usable.  
To prevent operation from being  
COLOR TEMP :ON  
SYSTEM MODE :ON  
CAMERA MODE :ON  
interrupted, replace the battery before it has discharged  
completely. For details, refer to the appropriate section in  
“6-3 Warning system.”  
#
< VF INDICATOR2 >  
4 SAVE (VTR power-saving) lamp  
TAPE  
BATTERY  
AUDIO LVL :ON  
TC :OFF  
VTR WARNING :NORMAL  
SAVE LED :SAVE  
:ON  
This lights when the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is set to  
SAVE. It goes off during recording.  
<Note>  
In the rec-pause mode, the SAVE mode is established  
automatically, and the lamp lights after the time set for the  
pause timer (temporary stop time) has elapsed.  
After two minutes in the play-pause mode, the SAVE  
mode is established automatically, and the lamp lights.  
:ON  
50  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Display item  
What is displayed  
Status when display appears  
This indicates the mode that the unit operates in.  
1080 interlace mode  
1 System mode  
1080  
720  
720 progressive mode  
This indicates the video systems for recording signals output from the  
2 Camera mode  
CCD on tape and outputting signals as HD SDI signals.  
1080-59.94i  
60i  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
50i  
25P  
60P  
50P  
1080-29.97P or 720-29.97P  
1080-23.98P or 720-23.98P (2-3 Pull-down)  
1080-23.98P (2-3-3-2 Pull-down)  
1080-50i  
1080-25P or 720-25P  
720-59.94P  
4
720-50P  
This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN.  
This indicates that a fixed shutter speed has been set.  
3 Shutter  
11/¢¢.¢  
1/60 (1/100) - 1/2000, HALF  
speed/mode  
This indicates the total length of the cassette tape.  
(This appears during a mode check.)  
4 Total length of  
¢¢¢min  
cassette tape  
5 Remaining tape  
6 Unit’s REC display  
7 Battery type  
¢¢¢min  
Under normal conditions, “¢¢¢min” lights, and this starts flashing  
while the tape is reaching the end.  
When the tape has reached the end, “  
=
=
=
END  
INH  
END” lights.  
INH” lights.  
=
When recording has been inhibited, “  
REC  
This appears when the extender unit has been connected to indicate  
the unit’s recording status using characters. It lights during recording,  
and it flashes while the unit’s mode is transferring to recording or  
when a warning has been issued.  
PROPAC14 to AC_ADPT  
This indicates the type of battery selected on the menu. “AC_ADPT”  
appears when an external DC power supply has been input.  
This indicates the remaining battery charge in 0.1V increments.  
This indicates the remaining digital battery charge in percent.  
This appears when the battery has no charge left.  
8 Remaining battery ¢¢.¢V  
charge/voltage  
¢¢¢%  
EMP  
This appears when the battery has a full charge.  
MAX  
LOW/MID/HIGH  
–3 to 30  
S.GAIN30/36  
DS.GAIN6:/10:/12:/  
15:/20:  
This indicates the master gain setting.  
Example: LOW = 0  
When S.GAIN and DS.GAIN functions have been allocated to the  
user switches, the corresponding gain values are displayed.  
9 MODE CHECK  
dedicated display  
area (STATUS:  
master gain, user  
switch gain)  
(Causes for ! LED  
to light: Displayed  
on the entire  
GAIN (0 dB)  
GAIN (–3 dB)  
DS.GAIN  
This indicates the current GAIN status.  
This indicates the current GAIN status.  
This indicates the current DS.GAIN value.  
screen.)  
LINE MIX  
SHUTTER  
WHITE PRE.  
EXTENDER  
BLACK GAMMA.  
MATRIX  
This indicates whether the current LINE MIX is ON or OFF.  
This indicates the current shutter status.  
≥An exclamation mark (!)  
appears next to items  
selected on the ! LED  
menu.  
This indicates the current WHITE BAL status.  
This indicates whether the current extender setting is on EX2 or OFF.  
This indicates whether the current black gamma setting is ON or OFF.  
This indicates whether the current MATRIX setting is A, B or OFF.  
This indicates whether the current COLOR CORRECTION setting is  
ON or OFF.  
≥An exclamation mark  
(
)
appears next to  
!
items for which the  
! LED lights.  
COLOR COR.  
FILTER  
This indicates the current filter status.  
(FUNCTION)  
VIDEO OUT  
This indicates the settings for signals output from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
MONI OUT  
This indicates the settings for signals output from the MON OUT  
connector.  
(AUDIO: front controls  
enable/disable)  
CH1: ON/OFF  
CH2: ON/OFF  
ON appears if the front CH1 control is enabled and OFF appears if it  
is disabled.  
ON appears if the front CH2 control is enabled and OFF appears if it  
is disabled.  
51  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Display item  
What is displayed  
Status when display appears  
(AUDIO: microphone  
power status)  
FRONT: ON/OFF  
REAR: ON/OFF  
This indicates the status of the front microphone’s power.  
This indicates the menu setting status for the rear microphone’s  
power.  
(AUDIO: channel  
input signals and  
levels)  
FRONT/W.L./REAR  
CH1/2/3/4  
This indicates the input signals and levels for the individual channels.  
AWB A ACTIVE  
AWB B ACTIVE  
AWB A OK ¢.¢K  
This appears during an AWB operation for channel A.  
This appears during an AWB operation for channel B.  
This appears when the AWB operation has been completed  
satisfactorily for channel A.  
This appears when the AWB operation has been completed  
satisfactorily for channel B.  
: Camera warning  
and message  
display area  
(Displays related to  
the AWB, ABB and  
switch operations)  
AWB B OK ¢.¢K  
AWB BREAK ¢.¢K  
AWB NG  
This appears when the AWB operation has been forcibly terminated.  
This appears when the AWB operation has not been completed  
satisfactorily. The status is indicated on the second line.  
This warns the user that the color temperature is too low.  
This warns the user that the color temperature is too high.  
This warns the user that the brightness is too high.  
This warns the user that the brightness is too low.  
This warns the user that the processing could not be executed  
within the operation time.  
COLOR TEMP LOW  
COLOR TEMP HIGH  
LEVEL OVER  
LOW LIGHT  
TIME OVER  
AWB PRESET ¢.¢K  
This appears when the AWB switch is set to PRE or when super gain  
is set and AWB cannot be executed.  
CHECK FILTER  
This warns the user to recheck the position of the filter selector control  
during the AWB operation.  
ABB ACTIVE  
ABB OK  
ABB BREAK  
ABB NG  
This appears during an ABB operation.  
This appears when the ABB operation has been completed satisfactorily.  
This appears when the ABB operation has been forcibly terminated.  
This appears when the ABB operation has not been completed  
satisfactorily.  
B-SHD READY  
This appears when the BLACK SHADING operation is ready to be  
performed as a result of holding down the ABB switch for a length of  
time during an ABB operation.  
B-SHD ACTIVE  
B-SHD OK  
This appears during a BLACK SHADING operation.  
This appears when the BLACK SHADING operation has been  
completed satisfactorily.  
B-SHD BREAK  
B-SHD NG  
This appears when the BLACK SHADING operation has been forcibly  
terminated.  
This appears when the BLACK SHADING operation has been not  
completed satisfactorily.  
(Switch selection  
displays)  
This appears when the position of the WHITE BAL switch has been  
changed. “A,” “B” or “PRE” appears at #.  
WHITE: # ¢.¢K  
This appears when the AUTO KNEE switch has been set to ON or OFF.  
This appears when the gain has been selected using the GAIN  
selector switch or USER button.  
AUTO KNEE: ON/OFF  
GAIN: ¢¢dB  
This indicates the shutter speed value when the shutter speed has  
been selected.  
SS: 1/¢¢¢¢  
This appears when synchro scan has been selected as the shutter  
speed.  
SS: 1 1/¢¢¢¢  
This appears when the CC filter setting has been selected.  
This appears when the ND filter setting has been selected.  
This appears when the lens extender has been set to ON or OFF.  
This appears when the iris overwrite correction value has been changed.  
CC: ¢¢¢¢ ¢¢K  
ND: ¢  
EXTENDER: ON/OFF  
IRIS: ¢¢ F ¢ ¢  
(LOW LIGHT  
LOW LIGHT  
This appears when the brightness has dropped.  
warning display)  
(Y GET value)  
With the Y GET ON setting, the output brightness level near the  
¢¢¢.¢%  
center marker is displayed as “%.”  
(MARKER display)  
MKR: A/B/OFF  
This indicates the type of marker presently being displayed.  
52  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Display item  
What is displayed  
Status when display appears  
INH  
“INH” is indicated when the operation of the USER button has been  
disabled.  
This indicates the value selected for S.GAIN.  
This indicates the value selected for DS.GAIN.  
This indicates whether LINE MIX GAIN is set to ON or OFF.  
This indicates whether S.IRIS is set to ON or OFF.  
This appears when the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is enabled (ON).  
This indicates whether SUPER BLACK is set to ON or OFF and, if it is  
set to ON, it also indicates its value.  
; Information  
allocated to USER  
buttons  
UM: USER MAIN  
U1: USER1 button  
U2: USER2 button  
S.GAIN ¢¢dB/OFF  
DS.GAIN ¢¢:/OFF  
LINE MIX ON/OFF  
S.IRIS ON/OFF  
I.OVR ON/OFF  
S.BLK –¢¢/OFF  
4
B.GAMMA ON/OFF  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
This indicates whether BLACK GAMMA (black level gradation  
compensation) is set to ON or OFF.  
This appears when the input signal to recorded on audio channel 1  
has been switched.  
This appears when the input signal to recorded on audio channel 2  
has been switched.  
This appears only during MODE CHECK button operations while the  
USER button functions as the REC switch.  
Y GET ON  
This appears when the function for measuring the output brightness  
level (in % units for approx. 3 seconds for the area near the center  
marker) is ON.  
RET SW  
This appears only during MODE CHECK button operations while the  
USER button functions as the RET switch.  
DRS  
EX2  
This appears when the DRS function is turned on.  
This appears when the lens extender is in use.  
<Extender  
This indicates the color temperatures assigned to the A, B, and PRE  
positions of the WHITE BAL switch. (These may be memory values  
during AWB operation or menu setting values.)  
= Color temperature ¢.¢K  
1 to 4  
A to D  
–
This indicates the position of the ND filter.  
This indicates the position of the CC filter.  
This indicates that the filter has not been set to a proper position.  
> Filter positions  
A
B
P
This indicates that the WHITE BAL switch is set to channel A.  
This indicates that the WHITE BAL switch is set to channel B.  
This indicates that the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRE.  
? WHITE BAL switch  
position  
This indicates the value of the cumulative gain (DS.GAIN) when this  
gain function is working.  
@ Cumulative gain  
6:/10:/12:/15:/20:  
display  
M
This appears when LINE MIX GAIN (+6 dB) is active.  
A LINE MIX GAIN  
display  
This indicates the current gain value.  
B Gain value  
¢¢dB  
REC WARNING  
SLACK E-¢¢  
This indicates that a problem has occurred during recording.  
This indicates that a problem has occurred in a mechanism.  
Depending on the nature of the trouble concerned, the power may be  
turned off automatically.  
C VTR warnings,  
information  
HUMID  
SERVO  
This indicates that condensation has formed.  
This indicates that servo lock has not been initiated during recording  
or playback.  
RF  
This indicates that the level of the signals from the tape has dropped.  
This signals that it is time to replace the backup battery. (Refer to  
page 93)  
BACKUP BATT EMPTY  
WIRELESS-RF  
This indicates that the level of the RF signal from the wireless  
microphone receiver has dropped.  
<Note>  
For details on the codes displayed in this area, refer to “6-3-2 Error  
codes.”  
TCG  
TCR  
12:59:59:20  
12:59:59:20  
This indicates the TCG (time code generator) value.  
This indicates the TCR (time code reader) value.  
This indicates the UBG VUBG display.  
D Time code display  
(V)UBG AB CD EF 00  
(V)UBR 12 34 56 78  
This indicates the UBR VUBR display.  
CTL  
–01:59:59:20  
This indicates the CTL-COUNTER value.  
53  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Display item  
What is displayed  
Status when display appears  
This indicates the audio channels selected and their audio levels.  
This appears when the AUDIO IN switch is at the FRONT position.  
This appears when the AUDIO IN switch is at the WIRELESS position.  
This appears when the AUDIO IN switch is at the REAR position.  
E AUDIO input  
system and level  
meter  
----∫---+  
F
W
R
B
S
This appears when S.BLK has been set to ON.  
This appears when S.IRIS has been set to ON.  
F Super black ON  
G Super iris ON  
++  
+
When the iris override function is working, this indicates how much  
compensation is provided.  
H Iris override  
display  
(No display)  
–
– –  
++:  
+:  
– –:  
–:  
The aperture is opened by a full stop.  
The aperture is opened by a half stop.  
The aperture is closed by a full stop.  
The aperture is closed by a half stop.  
No display: Reference status  
NC  
OPEN  
F1.7 to F16  
CLOSE  
This appears when the lens cable is not connected.  
This appears when the lens aperture is open.  
This indicates the aperture value (f-value) of the lens.  
This appears when the lens aperture is closed.  
<Note>  
I Iris, f-value  
These displays appear when using a lens equipped with an aperture  
value display function. They flash while the aperture is being  
changed for the iris override.  
Z00 to Z99  
This indicates the amount of zoom. Note that this item is not displayed  
even if the display setting is ON if the lens is not equipped with a  
zoom position return function.  
J Zoom display  
i (flashing)  
This appears in the INTERVAL REC mode during the times when the  
operation of the REC button is not acknowledged before the start of or  
at the end of recording.  
K Interval, pre-rec  
display  
iREC (lighting)  
This appears during an INTERVAL REC operation.  
iREC (flashing) ¢¢h¢¢m/¢¢s This appears during INTERVAL REC standby to indicate the wait time  
until the next recording.  
P-REC (flashing) ¢s  
This indicates the amount of time remaining until the end of the set  
PRE REC time during PRE REC operation.  
TAPE ¢s  
This appears when recording is stopped by turning OFF the PRE  
REC MODE (in the state where signals accumulated in the built-in  
memory are recorded on tape).  
(Jump indication)  
JUMP (flashing)  
DRS  
This appears during the jump function.  
This appears when the video level of a part with high brightness is  
compressed, and the function stretching the dynamic range is  
selected.  
L Dynamic range  
stretcher mode  
COMP  
This appears when setting the mode for suppressing distortion of  
compressed video images that may occur when dark parts are shot.  
M Compression  
mode  
54  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Viewfinder screen display selection  
Whether a display is  
Displayed only by  
to be shown or not  
can be selected on a  
menu.  
Status displayed  
when established  
Display can be  
cleared  
Displayed during  
playback  
MODE CHECK  
button (*1)  
—
—
≤
—
—
≤
—
—
—
≤
≤
≤
≤
—
—
—
—
—
≤
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 Systetm mode  
≤
≤
≤
—
≤
≤
—
≤
—
—
—
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
≤
≤
≤
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
2 Camera mode  
3 Shutter speed/mode  
4 Total length of cassette tape  
5 Remaining tape  
4
6 Unit’s REC display  
7 Battery type  
8 Remaining battery charge/voltage  
9 MODE CHECK dedicated display area  
: Camera warning, message display area  
; Information allocated to USER buttons  
< Extender  
= Color temperature  
> Filter positions  
? WHITE BAL switch position  
@ Cumulative gain display  
A LINE MIX GAIN display  
B Gain value  
C VTR warnings, information  
≤
D Time code display  
≤
≤
—
µ
≤
≤
(dependent upon  
menu)  
All input information  
for 4 channels  
E AUDIO input system and level meter  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
F Super black ON  
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
—
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
—
—
≤
—
≤
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
G Super iris ON  
H Iris override display  
I Iris, f-value  
J Zoom display  
K Interval, pre-rec display  
L Dynamic range stretcher mode  
M Compression mode  
*1 ≤: The display does not appear when OFF has been selected for the STATUS item setting on the <MODE CHK IND> screen.  
µ: Display always appears regardless of the menu.  
55  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-7-4 Display modes and setting  
#
< VF DISPLAY >  
changes/adjustment result messages  
DISP CONDITION  
DISP MODE  
:NORMAL  
:3  
VF OUT  
VF DTL  
:Y  
:3  
By setting the display mode item, it is possible to select  
various display methods for the changes made in the  
settings and for the messages advising the user of the  
adjustment results: for instance, the items displayed can be  
limited to a select number or not displayed at all. To select  
the display mode, perform menu operations to open the <VF  
DISPLAY> screen from the VF page and select the setting  
for the DISP MODE item.  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
LOW LIGHT LVL  
RC MENU DISP.  
MARKER/CHAR LVL  
:070%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:35%  
:ON  
:50%  
For details on operation, refer to “4-6-2 Basic menu  
operations.”  
Setting change/adjustment result messages and display modes  
Display mode  
setting  
Situation in which message is displayed  
Message  
1
2
3
When the filter selection has been changed  
When the gain setting has been changed  
CC: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4) or ND: m (m=A, B, C, D)  
≤
≤
≤
≤
µ
µ
GAIN: n dB  
(n= –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30)  
When the WHITE BAL switch setting has been changed WHITE: n (n=ACH, BCH, PRESET)  
≤
≤
≤
µ
µ
µ
When the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch has been set AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)  
to AUTO KNEE or OFF  
When the shutter speed/mode setting has been changed  
When the white balance (AWB) has been adjusted  
When the black balance (ABB) has been adjusted  
When the extender has been selected  
SS: 1/60 (or 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1 1/¢¢¢¢)  
Example) AWB A OK 3.2K  
Example) ABB OK  
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
µ
µ
µ
≤
µ
≤
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
Example) EXTENDER ON  
Example) UM: S.GAIN 30 dB  
Example) MKR: A  
When a user button has been selected  
When a marker select button has been selected  
When in iris overwrite status  
Example) ++ F 5.6  
µ: Message is to be displayed.  
≤: Message is not to be displayed.  
4-7-5 Setting the marker displays  
4-7-6 Setting the camera ID  
ON, OFF or the display type can be selected for the displays  
of the center marker, safety zone markers, safety zone area  
and frame marker. To make the selection, perform menu  
operations to open the <VF MARKER> screen from the VF  
page and select the display mode for each item.  
For details on operation, refer to “4-6-2 Basic menu  
operations.”  
The camera ID is set on the CAMERA ID screen.  
Up to ten alphanumerics, symbols and spaces can be used.  
<Note>  
The camera ID is not displayed while the setting menu is  
displayed even if color bar signals are output.  
Perform a menu operation to open the <CAMERA ID>  
screen from the OPERATION page.  
1
#
< VF MARKER >  
MKR:A  
#
< CAMERA ID >  
TABLE  
:A  
CENTER MARK  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
FRAME SIG  
FRAME MARK  
FLAME LVL  
:1  
:2  
:90%  
:4:3  
:OFF  
:15  
ID1 : ABCDEFGHIJ  
ID2 : ABCDEFGHIJ  
ID3 : ABCDEFGHIJ  
<Note>  
The MKR: A indication at the upper right of the screen shows  
the display status. To check the settings for TABLE B, press  
the MARKER SELECT so that MKR:B is displayed.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the “ID 1: to 3:” item.  
2
56  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-7-7 Mode check screen displays (MODE  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
moves to the ID input area, and the input mode is  
established.  
3
4
CHECK button function)  
The screens enabling the unit’s settings and modes to be  
checked can be displayed in the viewfinder.  
Each time the unit’s MODE CHECK button is pressed, one of  
the four screen displays is selected in the following  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is  
switched in the following sequence:  
sequence: STATUS screen display  
>
!LED screen display  
>
FUNCTION screen display AUDIO screen display.  
>
Space: ∑  
Each screen is displayed for about 3 seconds.  
7
When the MODE CHECK button is pressed and held, the  
screen is displayed continuously while the button is pressed.  
When the MODE CHECK button is pressed while one screen  
is displayed, the next screen is displayed.  
letters: A—Z  
4
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
To select whether to display the screens, perform menu  
operations to open the <MODE CHECK IND> screen from  
the VF page and select ON or OFF for each screen display.  
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
5
6
#
< MODE CHECK IND >  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the next position (right), and repeat steps 4 and 5 to set  
the characters.  
STATUS  
! LED  
FUNCTION  
AUDIO  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
:ON  
P.ON IND  
When the characters have been input, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:” position.  
7
8
9
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
returns to the ID 1:, ID 2: or ID 3: item.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
4-7-8 Marker check screen displays  
(MARKER SELECT button function)  
Confirm the display of CAMERA ID when setting the  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selection switch to “BARS.”  
The screens enabling the unit’s marker statuses to be  
checked can be displayed in the viewfinder.  
Each time the unit’s MARKER SELECT button is pressed,  
one or none of the two screen displays is selected in the  
<Note>  
following sequence: A marker screen display  
screen display no display.  
>
B marker  
The camera ID is recorded at the same time as the color  
bar signals if “CAMERA ID” on the VF INDICATOR  
screen has been set to “BAR.”  
The camera ID is not recorded for video signals other  
than the color bar signal.  
>
When the MARKER SELECT button is pressed while one  
screen is displayed, the next screen is displayed. Before  
this, perform menu operations to open the <VF MARKER>  
screen from the VF page, select A as the TABLE item  
setting, and select the marker information for the other items.  
Next, select B as the TABLE item setting, and select the  
marker information for the other items.  
If, for instance, “16:9” is selected for the FRAME SIG item as  
the A marker information and “4:3” is selected for the  
FRAME SIG item as the B marker information, then the 16:9  
and 4:3 aspect ratios can be checked easily by operating the  
MARKER SELECT button as and when required.  
57  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-8 Selection of video output signals  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
The unit employs the VIDEO OUT connector and the MON  
OUT connector as connectors for outputting video signals.  
OUTPUT ITEM  
MENU  
ONLY  
TC  
STATUS  
Set the characters to be superimposed on  
the output signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
MENU ONLY:  
4-8-1 Settings of signals output from  
VIDEO OUT connector  
The menu screen is superimposed only  
when the menu is accessed. This  
normally displays nothing.  
TC:  
Time codes are superimposed (when the  
menu is accessed, the menu screen is  
superimposed.)  
The signal modes for outputting signals from the VIDEO  
OUT connector are switched with the VIDEO OUT switch.  
HD SDI: To output the HD SDI signals  
STATUS:  
SD SDI: To output the down-converted SD SDI signals  
The characters that are the same as the  
VBS:  
To output the down-converted composite video  
signals.  
characters  
superimposed  
in  
the  
viewfinder screen are superimposed.  
(When the menu is accessed, the menu  
screen is superimposed.)  
VIDEO OUT switch  
The signals output from the VIDEO OUT connector are  
switched with the VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL switch.  
However, the switching operation is not acknowledged  
during the recording operation.  
VTR: In the recording or other EE mode, camera images  
are output from the connector; in playback mode,  
the VTR’s playback signals are output.  
CAM: The camera images are output at all times.  
VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL switch  
Set the characters to be superimposed on the signals output  
from the VIDEO OUT connector by using the VIDEO OUT  
CHARACTER switch and the OUTPUT ITEM item on the  
menu (<OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING  
page).  
VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch  
58  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Set the marker and user boxes to superimpose on the output  
signals from the VIDEO OUT connector by using the  
respective items on the <VIDEO OUT SETTING> screen  
(SYSTEM SETTING page) of the menu.  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
VIDEO OUT  
CENTR MARK  
OFF  
For setting the center marker to be  
superimposed on the output signals of the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
<Notes>  
1
2
3
4
O When the DOWNCON MODE item on the DOWNCON  
SETTING screen is set to LT-BOX or S-CROP, the frame  
marker and the safety marker are not displayed.  
O Settings in the SAFETY AERA item and the FRM SIG  
item are interlinked with the respective connectors of  
VIDEO OUT, MON OUT, and REMOTE.  
OFF: The center marker is not displayed.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Center blank (large)  
+ (small)  
4
Center blank (small)  
O Settings for the respective items of USER BOX WIDTH,  
USER BOX HEIGHT, USER BOX H POS, and USER  
BOX V POS are interlinked with the VIDEO OUT  
connector and the MON OUT connector.  
VIDEO OUT  
SAFETY MARK  
OFF  
1
2
For setting the type of safety marker frame  
to be superimposed on the output signals of  
the VIDEO OUT connector.  
OFF: The safety marker frame is not  
displayed.  
1:  
Box  
2:  
Corner frames  
SAFETY AREA  
80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%  
with a fixed ratio between of width and  
height.  
:
90%  
:
100%  
VIDEO OUT FRM  
MARK  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the frame marker on the  
output signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
FRM SIG  
4:3  
For setting the frame marker.  
The VISTA setting is 16:8.65.  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
VIDEO OUT USER  
BOX  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the user box on the  
output signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
O It is not superimposed when the VIDEO  
OUT switch is set to the SD-SDI or the  
VBS position.  
USER BOX WIDTH  
1
For setting the horizontal width of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
100  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
For setting the vertical height of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
100  
USER BOX H POS  
USER BOX V POS  
–50  
For setting the horizontal position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
–50  
For setting the vertical position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
O The user box can be displayed in any position as a box-  
type cursor.  
59  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Set the marker and user boxes to superimpose on the output  
4-8-2 Settings of signals output from MON  
OUT connector  
signals from the MON OUT connector by using the  
respective items on the <MONITOR OUT SETTING> screen  
(SYSTEM SETTING page) of the menu.  
Set the video signals output from the MON OUT connector  
by using the MONI OUT item on the menu (<OUTPUT SEL>  
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page).  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
The HD-Y signals can be used for applying GEN LOCK to  
other devices. It is impossible to superimpose markers and  
characters on the HD-Y signals.  
Even when the tape is replayed, images from the camera are  
output.  
MONI OUT CENTR OFF  
For setting the center marker to be  
superimposed on the HD SDI output signals  
of the MON OUT connector.  
MARK  
1
2
3
4
OFF: The center marker is not displayed.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Center blank (large)  
+ (small)  
Variable  
range  
Center blank (small)  
Item  
Remarks  
MONI OUT  
SAFETY MARK  
OFF  
1
2
For setting the type of the safety marker  
frame to be superimposed on the HD SDI  
output signals of the MON OUT connector.  
OFF: The safety marker frame is not  
displayed.  
MONI OUT  
HD-SDI  
HD-Y  
Set video signals output from the MON OUT  
connector.  
HD-SDI: For outputting the HD SDI signals  
HD-Y: For outputting the analog HD-Y  
signals  
1:  
Box  
Set to superimpose characters to the HD SDI signals output  
from the MON OUT connector in the MONI OUT CHARA  
item of the menu (<OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page).  
2:  
Corner frames  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
SAFETY AREA  
80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%  
with a fixed ratio between of width and  
height.  
:
90%  
MONI OUT CHARA ON  
Superimpose characters on the HD SDI  
output signals from the MON OUT  
connector.  
:
OFF  
100%  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
<Note>  
This does not link with the VIDEO OUT  
CHARACTER switch.  
MONI OUT FRM  
MARK  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the frame marker on the  
HD SDI output signals from the MON OUT  
connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
FRM SIG  
4:3  
For setting the frame marker.  
The VISTA setting is 16:8.65.  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
Switch the signals output from the MON OUT connector by  
using MONI OUT MODE item on the menu (<OUTPUT SEL>  
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page).  
MONI OUT USER  
BOX  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the user box on the HD  
SDI output signals from the MON OUT  
connector.  
Variable  
Item  
Remarks  
range  
ON: To superimpose  
MONI OUT MODE  
CAM  
VTR  
Switch the signals output from the MON  
OUT connector.  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
CAM: The camera images are output at all  
times.  
VTR: In the recording or other EE mode,  
camera images are output from the  
connector; in playback mode, the  
VTR’s playback signals are output.  
USER BOX WIDTH  
1
For setting the horizontal width of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
100  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
For setting the vertical height of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
100  
USER BOX H POS  
USER BOX V POS  
–50  
For setting the horizontal position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
–50  
For setting the vertical position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
O The user box can be displayed in any position as a box-  
type cursor.  
60  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-9-2 Selecting the F.AUDIO LEVEL control  
4-9 Menu-driven function setup  
function  
The functions can be set up using the unit’s menus.  
This function enables the recording level to be adjusted  
using the F.AUDIO LEVEL control.  
4-9-1 Setting the USER SW GAIN  
switching  
To select this function, perform menu operations to open the  
<MIC/AUDIO> screen from the VTR MENU page, and set  
whether to enable or disable the F.AUDIO LEVEL controls  
for the system selected as the input signals using the  
FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2 items.  
This unit allows three other modes to be used in addition to  
the L/M/H standard gain settings: the analog gain-up S.GAIN  
(super gain) mode to achieve a gain of 30 dB or more, the  
cumulative gain-up DS.GAIN (digital super gain) mode which  
uses progressive drive, and the LINE MIX GAIN mode where  
the gain of two lines is mixed.  
To select these functions, perform menu operations to open  
the <USER SW GAIN> screen from the OPERATION page,  
select the S.GAIN item and DS.GAIN item, and preset the  
gain to be used for each item. Furthermore, select the LINE  
MIX function on the <USER SW> screen.  
For instance, if the S.GAIN, DS.GAIN and LINE MIX GAIN  
functions have been allocated to the USER MAIN button,  
USER1 button or USER2 button, the gain can be increased  
by using these buttons in combination with the USER  
buttons.  
4
#
< MIC/AUDIO1 >  
FRONT VR CH1  
FRONT VR CH2  
MIC LOWCUT CH1  
MIC LOWCUT CH2  
MIC LOWCUT CH3  
MIC LOWCUT CH4  
LIMITER CH1  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:ON  
LIMITER CH2  
AUTO LEVEL CH3  
AUTO LEVEL CH4  
REC CH3/CH4  
:ON  
:SW  
CUE REC SELECT  
TEST TONE  
:CH1  
:NORMAL  
Setting items and what is set  
1) To increase the gain without increasing the  
perceptible noise  
The DS.GAIN function and the LINE MIX GAIN function  
are used.  
2) To increase the normal analog gain (in which case,  
the amount of noise will increase)  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
FRONT VR CH1  
FRONT  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
For selecting whether or not to enable the  
F.AUDIO LEVEL control for the input signals  
which have been selected for audio CH1.  
FRONT: The control works only when  
FRONT has been selected.  
Use only the S.GAIN function.  
OFF  
W.L.:  
The control works only when  
WIRELESS has been selected.  
<Note>  
Note that the accuracy of AUTO IRIS, White Balance, and  
Black Balance may be influenced by an increase in noise.  
3) To use the unit in the ultra-high-sensitivity mode  
Use the S.GAIN function and DS.GAIN or LINE MIX GAIN  
function in combination. However, exercise care during  
operation since image lag will become more conspicuous  
with moving subjects the more the gain is increased by  
using the DS.GAIN function.  
REAR: The control works only when  
REAR has been selected.  
ALL:  
OFF:  
The control works regardless of  
which input has been selected.  
The control does not work  
regardless of which input has  
been selected.  
Even if it is  
rotated, the recording level will not  
change.  
When shooting moving subjects, keep the gain increase  
with the LINE MIX GAIN function or DS.GAIN function to  
under +12 dB.  
FRONT VR CH2  
FRONT  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
For selecting whether or not to enable the  
F.AUDIO LEVEL control for the input signals  
which have been selected for audio CH2  
FRONT: The control works only when  
FRONT has been selected.  
OFF  
#
< USER SW GAIN >  
W.L.:  
The control works only when  
WIRELESS has been selected.  
S.GAIN  
¢30dB  
¢36dB  
REAR: The control works only when  
REAR has been selected.  
ALL:  
OFF:  
The control works regardless of  
which input has been selected.  
The control does not work  
regardless of which input has been  
selected. Even if it is rotated, the  
recording level will not change.  
DS.GAIN  
f
¢ 6dB  
f
f
f
f
¢10dB  
¢12dB  
¢15dB  
¢20dB  
Setting items and details  
S.GAIN:An analog gain increase with an asterisk is one that  
is valid. One without an asterisk is invalid.  
DS.GAIN:  
A
cumulative gain increase with an  
asterisk is one that is valid. One without  
an asterisk is invalid.  
61  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
B.GAMMA:  
4-9-3 Allocating functions to the USER  
The BLACK gamma function is allocated. This function  
highlights the black gradations.  
MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons  
Regardless of the value set in the BLACK GAMMA item  
on the menu (<LOW SETTING> screen, <MID SETTING>  
screen and <HIGH SETTING> screen on the PAINT  
page), the BLACK GAMMA is set to “+2”.  
AUDIO CH1:  
The desired functions can be allocated to the USER MAIN,  
USER1 and USER2 buttons.  
To select this function, perform menu operations to open the  
<USER SW> screen from the OPERATION page, and set  
the desired function each with the USER MAIN SW item,  
USER1 SW item and USER2 SW item.  
The function for switching the channel 1 input signal is  
allocated. Each press advances the setting through the  
sequence FRONT > W.L.> REAR. Note that it is also  
possible to change the setting by operating the AUDIO IN  
switch. Whichever control is operated last takes  
precedence.  
<Note>  
Once the power of the unit is turned OFF, functions assigned  
to the USER button are disabled. When the power is turned  
ON again, press the USER button to enable the assigned  
functions.  
AUDIO CH2:  
The function for switching the channel 2 input signal is  
allocated. Each press advances the setting through the  
sequence FRONT > W.L.> REAR. Note that it is also  
possible to change the setting by operating the AUDIO IN  
switch. Whichever control is operated last takes  
precedence.  
< USER SW >  
#
USER MAIN SW  
USER1 SW  
USER2 SW  
:S.GAIN  
:PRE REC  
:DS.GAIN  
REC SW:  
The function of the VTR’s START button is allocated.  
Y GET:  
The function for displaying the brightness level of the  
center marker area is allocated.  
RET SW:  
The function of the RET button on the lens is allocated.  
PRE REC:  
Functions which can be selected  
INH:  
The function to turn ON/OFF the PRE RECORDING is  
allocated.  
Time for executing the PRE RECORDING is set by using  
the PRE REC TIME item after performing menu  
operations to open the <REC FUNCTION> screen from  
the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
No functions are allocated.  
S.GAIN:  
The S.GAIN function is allocated.  
DS.GAIN:  
The DS.GAIN function is allocated.  
LINE MIX:  
The LINE MIX GAIN (+6 dB) function is allocated.  
S.IRIS:  
The SUPER IRIS function is allocated. This is useful  
when providing backlight compensation.  
I.OVR:  
DRS:  
The function of the dynamic range stretcher is allocated.  
The function is allocated to compress the video level with  
high brightness and stretched the dynamic range.  
<Notes>  
O Since the DRS function compresses the video levels of  
sections with high brightness, there are slight  
differences in color development when the DRS  
function is turned on/off.  
The IRIS override function is allocated.  
This changes the target (reference) value in the auto iris  
mode.  
To change the target value, first establish this mode, and  
then press the JOG dial button to enable the target value  
to be changed. The target value is changed by turning  
the JOG dial button clockwise or counterclockwise. “+,”  
“+ +,” “–” or “– –” is displayed on the left of the iris display  
area on the viewfinder screen. Stop turning the JOG dial  
button at the position to be changed, and press the JOG  
dial button to enter the change in the target value.  
To release this mode, press the USER button again. Once  
the power is turned off, the value returns to the default  
value.  
O When the DRS function is turned on, the Knee function  
and the BLACK GAMMA function are not available.  
O When the DRS function and the LINE MIX GAIN  
function are both turned on at the same time, the DRS  
function may deteriorate.  
+:  
+ +: The aperture is opened by a full stop.  
–: The aperture is stopped down by a half stop.  
The aperture is opened by a half stop.  
– –: The aperture is stopped down by a full stop.  
No display:  
The reference value remains unchanged.  
S.BLK:  
The SUPER BLACK function is allocated. This function  
reduces the black level to below the pedestal level.  
62  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-9-4 Setting the color temperature  
manually  
The white balance can be adjusted manually using the color  
temperature settings.  
The manual color temperature settings can be set  
independently for PRST, A, and B with the WHITE BAL  
switch.  
The manual color temperatures can be set in the respective  
positions of the WHITE BAL switch when color temperatures  
are set in the COLOR TEMP PRE item, the AWB A TEMP  
item, and the AWB B TEMP item.  
Using the menu operation, open the <WHITE BALANCE  
MODE> screen from the OPERATION page.  
<Note>  
4
Even if the color temperatures are set manually, when auto  
adjustment of the white balance is executed in the A or B  
position of the WHITE BAL switch, the color temperatures at  
that time are memorized for the A or B position of the WHITE  
BAL switch.  
#
< WHITE BALANCE MODE >  
FILTER INH :ON  
SHOCKLESS AWB :NORMAL  
AWB AREA :25%  
COLOR TEMP PRE :3200K  
AWB A TEMP :4300K  
AWB B TEMP :5600K  
63  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-10 Set data handling  
Set data file configuration  
The unit employs 5 sets for the file data area.  
FACTORY data:  
The area for storing factory settings  
Data cannot be revised with menu operations.  
USER data:  
The area for storing the data set by menu operations  
The FACTORY data is stored as the factory setting.  
CURRENT data:  
The area for storing the operating status of the unit  
The set value in this area is revised by menu operations.  
SCENE file:  
Four sets of scene files are provided.  
LENS file:  
Eight sets of lens files are provided.  
For menu items that can be read from or stored in the  
respective areas, refer to “Chapter 7 Menu description table.”  
SD memory card  
SET UP data  
It is possible to write eight setup  
files on the SD memory card.  
No. of files: 8  
Menu operations  
CARD READ/WRITE  
READ  
CARD READ/WRITE  
WRITE  
To revise the set  
value  
SCENE  
WRITE  
SCENE file  
No. of files: 4  
SCENE  
READ  
CURRENT data  
(Operating status of the unit)  
No. of files: 1  
LENS FILE  
READ  
WRITE USER READ USER  
DATA  
DATA  
USER data  
LENS file  
LENS FILE  
WRITE  
No. of files: 1  
No. of files: 8  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
FACTORY data  
(Revision disable)  
No. of files: 1  
LENS FILE CARD R/W  
READ  
LENS FILE CARD R/W  
WRITE  
SD memory card  
: Files built in the unit  
: Menu operations  
Lens file  
No. of files: 8k8  
It is possible to write eight titles for  
eight lens files on the SD memory  
card.  
64  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-10-1 Handling the setup card  
4-10-2 Setup card operations  
An SD memory card (optional accessory) can be used as a  
setup card that stores up to eight files of settings menu  
specifications.  
The setup card can be inserted or removed before or after  
the power is switched on.  
To format the setup card, save the setting data on the card  
or read the saved data from the card, first perform a menu  
operation to open the <CARD READ/WRITE> screen from  
the FILE page.  
#
< CARD READ/WRITE >  
<Notes>  
O The unit supports SD memory cards from 8 MB to 2 GB.  
O The SD memory card must be formatted using the unit.  
R.SELECT  
READ  
W.SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
4
Inserting the setup card  
Open the switch cover, position the SD memory card with its  
cutout facing up, insert it into the setup card insertion slot,  
and close the switch cover.  
TITLE:  
1: ******** 5: ********  
2: ******** 6: ********  
3: ******** 7: ********  
4: ******** 8: ********  
Formatting the setup card  
Perform the menu operations, and display the “CARD  
READ/WRITE” screen.  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the CARD CONFIG item.  
2
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears on the screen.  
3
<Note>  
Before inserting the setup card, check that it is pointed in the  
correct direction. If the card meets with resistance and if it is  
difficult to insert, it may mean that it is the wrong way round  
or upside down. Do not force the card into the slot but check  
its direction again and insert it properly.  
CONFIG?  
YES  
#
NO  
Removing the setup card  
Open the switch cover, check that the BUSY lamp is not  
lighted, and push the setup card further into the unit. This  
causes the card to partially pop out from the insertion slot.  
Take hold of the card, remove it, and close the switch cover.  
To proceed with the formatting of the setup card, turn the  
JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to YES, and  
press the JOG dial button. When the formatting of the  
card is completed, the following message appears.  
4
Bear in mind the following points when using and  
saving the setup cards.  
≥Avoid high temperatures and high humidity levels.  
≥Keep the cards away from water.  
≥Avoid exposing the cards to electrical charges.  
CONFIG OK  
65  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial button is  
Giving a title to the selected file  
pressed, the card will not be formatted  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the “TITLE : ” item.  
Error message  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
4
CONFIG NG NO CARD  
< CARD READ/WRITE >  
(setup card has not been inserted)  
R.SELECT  
READ  
W.SELECT  
WRITE  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
:1  
:1  
CONFIG NG ERROR  
(the card cannot be formatted)  
The card may be defective.  
Replace it.  
CONFIG NG  
WRITE PROTECT  
Remove the card to cancel write  
protect.  
#
TITLE:  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
1: ******** 5: ********  
2: ******** 6: ********  
3: ******** 7: ********  
4: ******** 8: ********  
5
<Note>  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is  
established.  
Data titles cannot be recognized when the setup card  
was inserted while the CARD READ/WRITE screen was  
open. Move the arrow (cursor) to the TITLE READ item,  
and press the JOG dial button.  
5
< CARD READ/WRITE >  
The data title is recognized, and the title is displayed.  
R.SELECT  
READ  
W.SELECT  
WRITE  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
:1  
:1  
Saving the data settings on the card  
Perform the menu operations, and display the “CARD  
READ/WRITE” screen.  
;
1
TITLE:  
1: ******** 5: ********  
2: ******** 6: ********  
3: ******** 7: ********  
4: ******** 8: ********  
Selecting the file No.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the W.SELECT item and press the JOG dial button.  
2
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is  
6
< CARD READ/WRITE >  
R.SELECT  
READ  
W.SELECT  
WRITE  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
:1  
:1  
switched in the following sequence:  
#
Space: ∑  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
TITLE:  
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
1: ******** 5: ********  
2: ******** 6: ********  
3: ******** 7: ********  
4: ******** 8: ********  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to select a number from 1 to 8,  
and press the JOG dial button.  
3
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the next position (right), and repeat steps 6 and 7 to set  
the characters (maximum of 8).  
66  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
Saving the data settings to the selected file  
13  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
When the data saving is completed, the following  
message appears.  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial button  
9
to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:” position.  
< CARD READ/WRITE >  
R.SELECT  
READ  
W.SELECT  
WRITE  
1
1
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
;
TITLE:  
4
1: ******** 5: ********  
2: ******** 6: ********  
3: ******** 7: ********  
4: ******** 8: ********  
WRITE OK  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
returns to the TITLE: item.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
10  
11  
12  
14  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the WRITE item.  
Loading the data saved on the card  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
Perform the menu operations, and display the “CARD  
READ/WRITE” screen.  
If the data is given a title when it is saved, the title will  
also be displayed.  
1
Selecting the file No.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the R.SELECT item and press the JOG dial button.  
2
WRITE?  
YES  
#
NO  
< CARD READ/WRITE >  
TITLE:  
#
R.SELECT  
READ  
W.SELECT  
WRITE  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
1
1
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial button is  
pressed, the data cannot be saved.  
Error message  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
TITLE:  
1: ******** 5: ********  
2: ******** 6: ********  
3: ******** 7: ********  
4: ******** 8: ********  
WRITE NG NO CARD  
(setup card has not been inserted)  
WRITE NG FORMAT ERROR  
(formatting error)  
The card was formatted by a device  
other than the unit.  
Replace the card.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select any number from 1 to  
8, and press the JOG dial button.  
WRITE NG ERROR  
(the data cannot be saved)  
The card may be defective.  
Replace it.  
3
WRITE NG  
WRITE PROTECT  
Remove the card to cancel write  
protect.  
67  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
If one of the following messages appears when the JOG dial button is  
pressed, the data cannot be loaded.  
Loading the data of the selected file  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the READ item.  
Error message  
Remedial action  
Insert the card.  
4
READ NG NO CARD  
< CARD READ/WRITE >  
(setup card has not been inserted)  
R.SELECT  
READ  
W.SELECT  
WRITE  
:1  
:1  
READ NG FORMAT ERROR  
(formatting error)  
The card was formatted by a device  
other than the unit.  
Replace the card.  
#
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
READ NG NO FILE  
(file not found)  
Save the file data.  
READ NG ERROR  
(the data cannot be loaded)  
Data saved by devices other than unit  
cannot be loaded.  
TITLE:  
1: ******** 5: ********  
2: ******** 6: ********  
3: ******** 7: ********  
4: ******** 8: ********  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
7
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
5
6
READ?  
YES  
NO  
#
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
When the data loading is completed, the following  
message appears.  
READ OK  
68  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Loading the user data  
4-10-3 How to use the user data  
Perform a menu operation to open the <SCENE>  
screen.  
The setting data can be written in the user data area of the  
unit’s internal memory and data written in the memory can be  
read from this area.  
Use of this data speeds up the process of reproducing  
suitable setup statuses.  
1
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the READ USER DATA item.  
< SCENE >  
Writing the setting data in the user area  
#
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
:1  
Perform a menu operation to open the <INITIALIZE>  
screen.  
1
4
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the WRITE USER DATA item.  
2
< INITIALIZE >  
READ FACTORY DATA  
#
WRITE USER DATA  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
3
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
3
READ?  
YES  
#
NO  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data written in the user data area of the unit’s  
internal memory is now read, and the setting is  
completed.  
4
5
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
#
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The setting data is now written in the user data area of  
the unit’s internal memory.  
4
5
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
69  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-10-4 How to use the scene file data  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
The setting data can be written in the scene file area of the  
unit’s internal memory and the data written can be read from  
this area. Up to four scene files can be registered. By using  
this data, the appropriate setup statuses can be established  
speedily.  
At the factory, the unit’s default statuses were set in  
TITLE1-4.  
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
Writing the setting data used for the scene files  
#
Perform a menu operation to open the <SCENE>  
screen.  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The setting data is now stored in the scene file area of  
the unit’s internal memory.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the SCENE SEL item.  
2
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene file  
number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial button to  
select the scene file in which data is to be saved.  
3
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
< SCENE >  
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
#
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the WRITE item.  
< SCENE >  
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
;1  
#
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
70  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Reading the setting data used for the scene files  
Returning the setting data used for the scene files  
to the factory settings  
Perform a menu operation to open the <SCENE>  
screen.  
1
Perform a menu operation to open the <SCENE>  
1
screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the SCENE SEL item.  
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the SCENE SEL item.  
2
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene file  
number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial button to  
select the scene file whose data is to be loaded.  
3
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the scene file  
number starts flashing. Turn the JOG dial button to  
select the scene file whose data is to be reset.  
3
4
< SCENE >  
< SCENE >  
READ USER DATA  
#
SCENE SEL  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
#
:1  
RESET  
WRITE  
RESET  
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to enter the scene file.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the READ item.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the RESET item.  
< SCENE >  
< SCENE >  
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
#
:1  
RESET  
WRITE  
#
RESET  
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
READ?  
YES  
NO  
RESET?  
YES  
#
#
NO  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the unit’s  
internal memory is read, and the setting is completed.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the unit’s  
internal memory is reset and the factory settings are  
restored.  
7
8
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
71  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Appending titles to the setting data used for the  
scene files  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
returns to the TITLE1, 2, 3 or 4 item.  
8
9
Perform a menu operation to open the <SCENE>  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the WRITE item.  
screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the scene file TITLE1, 2, 3 or 4 item where the title is to  
be appended.  
2
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
10  
< SCENE >  
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
#
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
#
TITLE:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The title is stored in the scene file area of the unit’s  
internal memory.  
11  
12  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is  
established.  
3
4
< SCENE >  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
READ USER DATA  
SCENE SEL  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESET  
;
TITLE1 : ********  
TITLE2 : ********  
TITLE3 : ********  
TITLE4 : ********  
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is  
switched in the following sequence:  
Space: ∑  
7
letters: A—Z  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
5
6
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the next position (right), and repeat steps 4 and 5 to set  
the characters (maximum of 8).  
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial button  
to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:” position.  
7
72  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-10-5 Method for returning to user  
settings  
4-10-6 Method for returning to the factory  
settings  
It is possible to return the settings of the menu on the unit to  
the user settings that were registered previously in  
accordance with “4-10-3 How to use the user data.”  
There are two methods: one that reads out the USER DATA  
saved in accordance with “4-10-3 How to use the user data,”  
and the other method that returns without menu operations.  
It is possible to return the settings of the menu on the unit to  
the factory settings.  
Open the <INITIALIZE> screen with the menu  
1
operations.  
Move the arrow (cursor) to the READ FACTORY DATA  
by turning the JOG dial button.  
2
Operation method without performing FILE menu  
operations  
4
< INITIALIZE >  
Set the POWER switch to the OFF position.  
1
#
READ FACTORY DATA  
WRITE USER DATA  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the PRST position.  
2
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message.  
3
WHITE BAL  
switch  
Set the POWER switch to the ON position while holding  
up the AUTO W/B BAL switch.  
The USER menu item settings are all returned together  
to the standard user data.  
3
READ?  
YES  
NO  
#
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the JOG dial  
button, and then press the JOG dial button.  
The unit is reset to the factory settings.  
O User data is not changed.  
4
5
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operations.  
73  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Adjustment of gain offset  
For correcting changes in white balance that may occur  
4-10-7 Lens file  
when replacing the lens.  
The built-in memory of the unit stores eight sets of lens files.  
On the SD memory card, eight titles for eight sets of lens  
files in a table (total 64 sets) can be written.  
The following data are recorded on the lens file.  
O Title name  
O White shading correction value  
O Flare compensation value  
Mount the lens as standard on the unit.  
1
Shoot the grayscale chart with appropriate lighting (2000  
lx, 3200 K are preferable).  
2
O RB gain offset correction value  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the “A” position.  
3
4-10-8 How to provide lens files  
Adjust the lens aperture so that the white window at the  
center of the grayscale chart is about 80%.  
4
Adjustment of white shading  
For the white shading adjustment, refer to “5-3 Adjusting the  
white shading of the lens.”  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to “AWB” to adjust the  
white balance automatically.  
5
Adjustment of the flare  
Measure the signal level of RGB by using the waveform  
monitor (WFM).  
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE ADJ>  
screen from the MAINTENANCE page and adjust the flare in  
the LENS R FLARE item, the LENS G FLARE item and the  
LENS B FLARE item.  
6
Replace the lens to one where a lens file is provided.  
7
#
< LENS FILE ADJ >  
Adjust the lens aperture so that the signal level of Gch is  
the same signal level as the one obtained in 6 above.  
8
RB GAIN CTRL RESET:ON  
LENS R GAIN OFFSET:+000  
LENS B GAIN OFFSET:+000  
LENS R FLARE  
LENS G FLARE  
LENS B FLARE  
:000  
:000  
:000  
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE ADJ>  
screen from the MAINTENANCE page and set the RB  
GAIN CTRL RESET to ON.  
9
Adjust the signal level of Rch to be the same as Gch in  
the LENS R OFFSET item.  
10  
Example of the chart for flare adjustment  
In the same way, adjust the signal level of Bch to be the  
same as Gch in the LENS B OFFSET item.  
11  
0.1H  
0.1L  
74  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-10-9 To save the lens file into the built-in  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is  
established.  
6
memory  
Select the file No.  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE>  
screen from the FILE page.  
1
RESETALL  
m
TITLE:  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the FILE SELECT item  
2
2:  
3:  
4:  
4
Press the JOG dial button and the file number will flash.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the file (1 to 8) to be  
recorded.  
3
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
7
<LENSFILE>  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is  
switched in the following sequence:  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESETALL  
Space: )  
7
TITLE:  
n
letters: A—Z  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
7
numbers: 0—9  
7
symbols: ’, >, <, /, –, . , x  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the character.  
8
9
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number.  
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the next position (right), and repeat steps 7 and 8 to set  
the characters (maximum of 12).  
Give a title to the selected file.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the “TITLE : ” item.  
5
When the title has been input, turn the JOG dial button  
to move the arrow (cursor) to the “:” position.  
10  
<LENSFILE>  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
RESETALL  
RESETALL  
TITLE:  
n
m
222222222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
1:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
75  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow  
(cursor) returns to the TITLE: item.  
11  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESETALL  
222222222222  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the WRITE position.  
12  
13  
14  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
WRITE  
RESETALL  
n
222222222222  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
WRITE?  
YES  
NO  
n
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The current white shading correction value, the flare  
compensation value, and the RB gain offset correction  
value are stored in the built-in memory of the unit.  
<Note>  
The values will not be stored in the unit’s internal  
memory if another menu screen is selected without  
executing WRITE or if the menu is exited.  
Press the MENU button twice upon completion of the  
adjustment.  
15  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
76  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-10-10 To read the lens file from the built-  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the JOG dial button.  
The recorded data from the white shading file is read.  
7
in memory  
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE> screen  
from the FILE page.  
1
2
3
8 Press the MENU button twice.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the FILE SELECT item  
4
Press the JOG dial button and the file number will flash.  
Turn the JOG dial button to select the file (1 to 8) to be  
read.  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
:1  
n
WRITE  
RESETALL  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number.  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the READ item  
<LENSFILE>  
FILESELECT  
READ  
WRITE  
:1  
n
RESETALL  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
6
<CAMCARDREAD/WRITE>  
READ  
SELECT  
WRITE  
SELECT  
:1  
:1  
CARDCONFIG  
READUSERDATA  
TITLE  
:
READ?  
YES  
NO  
n
77  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
4-10-11 To write in and read out the lens  
file to/from the SD memory card  
Saving lens files on the SD memory card  
Select the card file No.  
The contents of the eight lens files stored in the unit’s  
internal memory can be saved onto an SD memory card as  
card files under a single title. A total of eight titles can be  
saved on an SD memory card.  
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE CARD  
1
R/W> screen from the FILE page.  
Furthermore, the eight lens files saved under one title on an  
SD memory card can be loaded into the unit’s internal  
memory.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the CARD FILE SELECT item  
2
The correlation between the lens files stored in the internal  
memory and lens files saved on an SD memory card is  
shown below.  
Press the JOG dial button and the card file number will  
flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select the file (1 to 8)  
to be recorded.  
3
<LENSFILECARDR/W>  
CARDFILESELECT:1  
READ  
n
WRITE  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE:  
Internal memory  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Up to 8 sets of the lens file  
can be stored in the built-in  
memory.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8 lens files  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number.  
4
The contents of 8 lens files can  
be saved onto an SD memory  
card as card files under one title  
or they can be loaded from the  
SD memory card.  
Give a title to the selected card file.  
Card files  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the “TITLE : ” item.  
5
Title 1  
Title 2  
Title 3  
Title 4  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
<LENSFILECARDR/W>  
CARDFILESELECT:1  
READ  
WRITE  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE:  
n
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Title 5  
Title 6  
Title 7  
Title 8  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is  
established.  
6
Now perform step 7 on page 75 through step 15 on page  
76.  
A total of 64 lens files (8 lens files k 8 titles) can be saved on  
an SD memory card.  
78  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and settings for recording (continued)  
Loading lens files from the SD memory  
card  
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE CARD  
R/W> screen from the FILE page.  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the CARD FILE SELECT item  
2
4
Press the JOG dial button and the card file number will  
flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select the file (1 to 8)  
to be read.  
3
<LENSFILECARDR/W>  
CARDFILESELECT:1  
READ  
n
WRITE  
TITLEREAD  
TITLE:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number.  
4
Now perform steps 5 through 8 on page 77.  
<Note>  
The card file titles on the SD memory card are displayed on  
the LENS FILE (CARD R/W) screen, but the titles of the  
lens files contained in the card files are not shown on this  
screen.  
To display these titles, load the files, and check the titles on  
the LENS FILE screen.  
The lens files in the unit’s internal memory will be rewritten  
as the loaded lens files at this time. For this reason, save  
the lens files in the internal memory onto the SD memory  
card first to back them up before loading them on the SD  
memory card.  
79  
Chapter 5 Preparation  
5-1-1 Attaching the battery and setting the  
battery type  
5-1 Supplying the power  
A battery pack or an external DC power supply can be used  
as this unit’s power supply.  
Using the Anton/Bauer battery pack  
To use the battery pack, there is the following  
choice of makes of batteries:  
Attach the battery pack made by Anton/Bauer.  
1
Power output connector for lighting  
Battery pack made  
≥Anton/Bauer  
≥IDX  
by Anton/Bauer  
≥PACO  
≥Sony  
Types of battery can be confirmed and revised in the  
viewfinder or the menu screen on the monitor.  
≥Press the MODE CHECK button on the side panel of the  
unit to display the type of the battery currently set at the top  
right of the viewfinder screen.  
≥Using the menu operation, open the <BATTERY/TYPE>  
screen from the VTR MENU page to confirm/change it in  
the BATTERY SELECT item.  
Lighting control  
switch  
#
< BATTERY/TAPE >  
<Reference>  
A battery holder made by Anton/Bauer is equipped with a  
power output connector for the lighting and a lighting control  
switch to enable a light to be easily attached. For details on  
the lighting systems available, contact Anton/Bauer.  
BATTERY SELECT  
EXT DC IN SELECT  
BATT NEAR END ALARM :OFF  
BATT NEAR END CANCEL:ON  
BATT END ALARM :ON  
BATT REMAIN FULL :70%  
:DIONIC  
:AC-ADPT  
TAPE NEAR END ALARM :ON  
TAPE NEAR END TIME :2min  
TAPE END ALARM :ON  
TAPE REMAIN/∫ :3min/∫  
Insert the battery pack and slide it in the direction of the  
arrow.  
2
<Notes>  
≥Batteries of other makes can also be supported by  
changing the setting menu but no guarantees are made for  
the system when they are actually used with this unit.  
≥Before using the battery pack, recharge the battery using  
the battery charger.  
(For details on the recharging method, refer to the  
operating instructions of the battery concerned.)  
Release lever  
<Reference>  
To remove the battery pack, slide it in the opposite direction  
to the one in which it was attached while keeping the release  
lever on the battery holder pulled down all the way.  
Set the battery type.  
Select the battery type using the BATTERY SELECT  
3
menu item.  
This item is selected from the  
<BATTERY/TAPE> screen on the VTR FUNCTION  
page.  
For details, refer to “7-8-3 BATTERY SETTING1.”  
Anton/Bauer batteries which can be used  
O PROPAC14  
O TRIMPAC14  
O HYTRON50  
O HYTRON100  
O HYTRON120  
O DIONIC90  
O DIONIC100  
O DIONIC160  
80  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
Using the NP-1 type battery pack  
CAUTION:  
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified  
service personel only. To reduce the risk of electric  
shock, do not perform any servicing other than that  
contained in the operating instructions unless you are  
qualified to do so.  
Remove the battery holder.  
1
Attach the NP-1 type battery case to the unit.  
2
5
1 Tighten the mounting screws.  
Set the battery type.  
Select the battery type using the BATTERY SELECT  
3
2 Tighten the power contact screws.  
3 Insert the top of the detached cover in the direction  
shown by the arrows.  
4 Align the holes in the bottom of the cover (metal part)  
with the holes at the bottom of the case, and use the  
screws to attach the case.  
menu item.  
This item is selected from the  
<BATTERY/TAPE> screen on the VTR FUNCTION  
page.  
When using another battery which cannot be selected  
using the BATTERY SELECT item setting, select TYPE  
A or TYPE B, and set the items that correspond to the  
characteristics of the battery.  
<Note>  
When mounting the battery holder, take care not to pinch  
the connecting cord.  
For details, refer to “7-8-4 BATTERY SETTING2.”  
<Note>  
NP-1 type Battery case  
Address all inquiries concerning the V-mount adapter  
plate to your dealer.  
1
4
2
3
Using the V-mount type battery pack  
Attach the V-mount adapter plate.  
Insert it in the direction shown by the arrows, and slide it into  
place.  
81  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-1-2 Use of the external DC power supply  
Connect the external DC power supply to the DC IN  
socket on the unit.  
1
DC IN socket  
External DC  
power supply  
Turn “ON” the power switch of the external DC power  
supply.  
(If the power switch is available on the external DC  
power supply)  
2
Turn ON the POWER switch on the unit.  
3
Rush current may occur at the time for turning on the  
power of the unit.  
We recommend using an external DC power supply  
capable to secure double or more capacity of the total  
power consumption of the devices connected to the  
unit such as the viewfinder and lights. Use a DC cable  
with a capacity of 10A or more.  
Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output  
connector of the external DC power supply and the  
DC IN socket on the unit, and connect the proper  
polarities to each other.  
If the +12 V power supply is connected to the GND  
connector in error, it may cause a fire or failure of the  
unit.  
4
3
2
1: GND  
4: +12V  
1
DC IN socket  
<Notes>  
O If both the battery pack and the external DC power supply  
are connected, the electric power is supplied from the  
external DC power supply. While the external DC power  
supply is used, the battery can be mounted and removed  
on/from the unit.  
O When the external DC power supply is used, ensure that  
the power switch of the external DC power supply is  
turned on first and then the POWER switch on the unit is  
turned on. In the case of the reverse operation, a  
malfunction may occur on the unit since the output voltage  
of the external DC power supply is raised slowly.  
82  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
Adjusting the lens flange  
5-2 Attaching the lens and adjusting  
the flange back  
If the subject is not focused properly in the telephoto and  
wide-angle modes during zoom operations, adjust the flange  
back (distance from the lens mounting surface to the image-  
forming surface).  
Attaching the lens  
Once this adjustment is done, it need not be redone unless  
the lens is replaced.  
Raise the lever for securing the lens, and detach the  
mount cap.  
<Note>  
1
For details on the adjustment method and lens positions,  
refer also to the operating instructions that accompany the  
lens.  
Lever for  
securing the lens  
Attach the lens to the camera.  
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens cable.  
1
5
Set the lens aperture to manual and open the aperture.  
2
Mount cap  
Align the center mark of the lens with the groove in the  
top center of the lens mount, and attach the lens.  
2
Approx.  
3 meters  
Mark  
Set the lighting in such a way that the appropriate video  
3
output level is achieved at a distance of about 3 meters  
away from the chart used for the flange back adjustment.  
If the video level is too high, use the filters and shutter.  
Push down the lever for securing the lens to secure the  
lens.  
3
Loosen the screw securing the F.f (flange focus) ring.  
4
<Note>  
On some lenses, this may be marked as F.b (flange  
back) ring.  
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position either  
manually or electrically.  
5
Shoot the chart used for the flange back adjustment, and  
turn the distance ring to adjust the focus.  
6
Push the cable into the cable clamp, and connect it to  
the LENS socket.  
4
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position, and turn  
7
the F.f ring to adjust the focus.  
Take care not to move the distance ring during this  
process.  
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the focus is adjusted at both the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
8
Tighten the screw securing the F.f ring.  
LENS socket  
9
Proceed with the flange back adjustment for the lens.  
<Notes>  
5
≥For details on how to handle the lens, refer to the  
operating instructions of the lens.  
≥While the lens is removed, attach the mount cap to  
protect the unit.  
83  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
Set the lens aperture control to manual, and adjust it so  
that the zebra pattern covers the whole screen. Check  
that the lens aperture is between F4 and F10.  
5-3 Adjusting the white shading of  
the lens  
7
8
<Notes>  
Method to correct the waveform to be more flat by  
combining the sawtooth-shaped waveform and the  
parabola waveform when watching the respective  
waveforms of R, G and B of the video signals.  
≥The zebra pattern will not cover the whole screen if  
there is any unevenness in the lighting. In this case,  
make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.  
≥Make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.  
also when the lens aperture is not between F4 and  
F10.  
White shading adjustment is disabled when the DS. GAIN is  
turned ON or the LINE MIX GAIN function operates. Adjust  
the white shading in the following manner after turning OFF  
the DS. GAIN and releasing the LINE MIX GAIN function.  
≥Be absolutely sure to leave the electronic shutter at  
OFF.  
<Note>  
1 Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to “A” or “B,” and  
use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the white  
balance automatically (AWB).  
2 Use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the black  
balance automatically (ABB).  
3 Again, use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the  
Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the  
lens aperture is open even when the white shading has been  
adjusted. This is something that is inherent to lenses and  
optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a failure or  
malfunctioning.  
white balance automatically (AWB).  
Attach the lens to the camera.  
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens cable.  
1
Repeat step 7.  
9
Set the electronic shutter to OFF and the gain to “L (0  
dB).”  
2
Using the menu operation, open the <WHITE  
SHADING> screen from the MAINTENANCE page and  
adjust a range of items from R H SAW item to B V PARA  
item, so that the waveform is more flat.  
10  
If the extender is attached to the lens, release the  
extender function.  
3
< WHITE SHADING >  
Perform a menu operation to open the <GAMMA>  
CORRECT  
R H SAW  
R H PARA  
R V SAW  
R V PARA  
G H SAW  
G H PARA  
G V SAW  
G V PARA  
B H SAW  
B H PARA  
B V SAW  
B V PARA  
:ON  
4
#
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
:+000  
screen from the PAINT page, and check that “STD” is  
selected as the GAMMA MODE SEL item setting. Then  
open the <VF DISPLAY> screen from the VF page,  
check that the settings selected for the ZEBRA1  
DETECT item, ZEBRA2 DETECT item and ZEBRA2  
item match the settings shown in the figure below. If  
they differ, make the appropriate changes, and then  
close the menu screen.  
#
< VF DISPLAY >  
H SAW  
DISP CONDITION  
DISP MODE  
:NORMAL  
:3  
VF OUT  
VF DTL  
:Y  
:3  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
ZEBRA2  
LOW LIGHT LVL  
RC MENU DISP.  
MARKER/CHAR LVL  
:070%  
:085%  
:SPOT  
:35%  
:ON  
:50%  
Before  
After  
correction  
correction  
H PARA  
Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder to ON.  
5
6
Shoot a white sheet of paper with no unevenness of  
color.  
<Note>  
Since fluorescent lights, mercury lamps and other such  
kinds of lighting tend to flicker, use a light source which  
is free from flicker such as sunlight or a halogen lamp.  
84  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
When the lens is provided with an extender, turn on the  
11  
extender function, and repeat steps 7 to 9.  
(Once the extender function is turned on, the set values  
shown on the menu screen change.)  
The adjustment values of the two resulting patterns–one  
when the lens extender is provided and the other when it  
is not provided–are stored in the unit as the data of one  
lens file.  
When making the white shading correction, make the  
adjustment while observing the R, G, and B waveforms in the  
horizontal and vertical directions with the waveform monitor.  
This now completes the white shading adjustments.  
The adjustment values are now stored in the non-volatile  
memory so that even when the unit’s power is turned off,  
there will be no further need to perform the white shading  
adjustment.  
5
85  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-4 Audio input signal preparations  
5-4-2 When using a wireless receiver  
When using a UniSlot wireless receiver  
Prepare to connect the audio components which will supply  
the audio signals to the unit.  
Remove the slot cover, insert the wireless receiver, and  
1
screw it down.  
5-4-1 When using the front microphone  
The microphone of the AJ-MC900G mic kit (optional  
accessory) can be attached to the viewfinder.  
Open the mic holder.  
1
Set the AUDIO IN switches to WIRELESS for the audio  
channels whose audio signals are to be recorded.  
2
Attach the microphone, and tighten the locking screw.  
2
UP  
Install the microphone by setting the  
the top.  
indication to  
Locking  
screw  
Connect the microphone’s connecting cable to the MIC  
IN jack on the camera.  
3
4
MIC IN jack  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches to “FRONT” in  
accordance with the audio channel or channels whose  
sound is to be recorded.  
AUDIO IN  
switches  
86  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-4-3 When using an audio component  
5-5 Mounting the unit on a tripod  
Use the tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) to mount the unit on a  
tripod.  
Connect the AUDIO IN connectors on the camera with  
the audio component using the XLR cable.  
1
Mount the tripod adapter on the tripod.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch or switches for the channel or  
channels to which the audio component has been  
connected to “REAR.”  
1
2
Tripod adapter  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear panel  
to “LINE.”  
3
Tripod head  
5
<Note>  
Take account of the center of gravity of the unit and that of  
the tripod adapter when selecting the adapter hole. Check  
that the diameter of the hole selected matches the diameter  
of the tripod head screw.  
LINE/MIC/+48V  
selector switch  
Mount the unit on the tripod adapter.  
2
AUDIO IN connectors  
AUDIO IN switches  
Slide the unit along the groove toward the front until it clicks  
into place.  
Detaching the unit from the tripod adapter  
Tripod adapter  
Red lever  
Black lever  
While pushing down the red lever, move the black lever in  
the direction of the arrow and slide the unit toward the back  
to remove it.  
<Note>  
If the pin of the tripod adapter fails to return to its original  
position after the unit has been detached, again move the  
black lever in the direction of the arrow while pushing down  
the red lever, and return the pin to its original position. Bear  
in mind that the unit cannot be attached if the pin remains in  
the center.  
87  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-6 Attaching the shoulder belt  
5-8 Attaching the rain cover  
Example showing use of the SHAN-RC700 rain  
cover  
Shoulder belt  
The tab opens  
when it is  
pressed.  
Tighten the cord.  
To disengage the shoulder belt, press the tabs.  
<Note>  
Check that the shoulder belt is attached securely.  
5-7 Adjusting the position of the  
shoulder pad  
Close using the fastener.  
Close using the fastener.  
The shoulder pad can be moved while the slide lever is held  
down. Its position can be adjusted in 3 mm steps (up to  
max. of 10 steps or 30 mm) in either the front or back  
direction.  
5-9 Attaching the FRONT AUDIO  
LEVEL control knob  
While holding down the slide lever, move the shoulder pad  
toward the front or back to the optimum shooting position.  
When the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is to be operated  
frequently, the accessory knob can be attached to make it  
easier to operate the control.  
FRONT AUDIO  
LEVEL control  
Slide lever  
Knob (accessory)  
Screw  
(accessory)  
Index  
marks  
Screw  
5
Remove the screw at the center of the FRONT AUDIO  
LEVEL control, and secure the accessory knob to the control  
and unit behind using the same screw (accessory). Make  
sure that the index mark on the knob side is aligned with the  
index mark on the control side.  
88  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-10 Connection of the remote  
control unit (AJ-RC10G)  
5-11 Connection of the external  
switch  
It is possible to control some of the functions remotely by  
connecting the remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional  
accessory).  
When AJ-RC10G is connected to the REMOTE connector on  
the unit and the power switches of both of the unit and AJ-  
RC10G are turned on, the unit automatically enters the  
remote control mode.  
It is possible to draw 1.5 A current from the DC OUT  
connector of the unit.  
REC start/stop can be controlled by connecting an external  
switch to this connector.  
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting an LED to this  
connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing the  
camera on a crane.  
The remote control mode is released when AJ-RC10G is  
removed or the power for the AJ-RC10G is turned OFF.  
Switch functions in the remote control mode  
In the remote control mode, the following switches and  
buttons on the unit are disabled.  
O SHUTTER switch  
5
O MENU button  
O JOG dial button  
O GAIN switch  
O OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch  
O WHITE BAL switch  
O USER MAIN button  
DC OUT connector  
O USER 1 button  
O USER 2 button  
Connector at the cable side  
HR10A-7R-4P(73)  
(Hirose Denki)  
VTR operations in the remote control mode  
In the remote control mode, the VTR can be operated with  
either the unit or AJ-RC10G.  
4
3
1
2
<Notes>  
O The state that was adjusted by connecting AJ-RC10G is  
stored in the unit. Not to store the adjusted state in the  
unit, open the FUNCTION MENU of AJ-RC10G to set the  
RC DATA SAVE item to “OFF”.  
O When the dedicated cable is connected or removed,  
ensure that the POWER switches on both the main unit  
and AJ-RC10G are turned “OFF”.  
LED  
Resistance  
Dedicated cable  
REC start/stop  
Max. 50 mA  
AJ-RC10G  
1: GND  
2: TALLY OUT  
Open collector output on the unit side  
TALLY ON: Low impedance  
TALLY OFF: High impedance  
3: REC start/stop switch  
REMOTE connector  
This is connected in parallel to the REC START button on the unit or the  
VTR button on the lens  
4: +12V  
89  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections  
6-1-2 Inspecting the camera unit  
6-1 Inspections prior to shooting  
Before setting off for a shooting session, perform the  
following inspections to verify that the system is functioning  
correctly. It is recommended that a color video monitor be  
used to check the images.  
Set the zoom to the motorized zoom mode, and check  
its operations in this mode.  
Check that the image changes when the zoom is set to  
the telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
1
6-1-1 Preparation for inspections  
Set the zoom to the manual zoom mode, and check its  
operations in this mode.  
Turn the manual zoom lever, and check that the image  
changes when the zoom is set to the telephoto and  
wide-angle positions.  
2
Insert a fully charged battery.  
1
Set the POWER switch to ON, and check that the  
HUMID display has not come on and that at least 5  
segments of the BATTERY display are lighted.  
2
Set the aperture to the auto adjustment mode, point the  
lens at some objects with different brightness levels, and  
check that the auto aperture adjustment works.  
3
≥If the HUMID display has come on, wait until it goes  
off.  
≥If fewer than 5 segments of the BATTERY display  
have lighted, replace the battery with one having an  
adequate charge.  
Set the aperture to the manual adjustment mode, turn  
the aperture ring, and check that the manual aperture is  
adjusted.  
4
1
While holding down the auto instantaneous aperture  
5
adjustment button, point the lens at some objects with  
different brightness levels, and check that the auto  
instantaneous aperture adjustment function works.  
Return the aperture to the auto adjustment mode, switch  
the GAIN switch setting to L, M and H, and check that:  
6
≥The aperture is adjusted for objects of the same  
brightness level in tandem with the switching of the  
gain setting.  
2
≥The gain displayed on the viewfinder screen is  
switched in tandem with the switching of the gain  
setting.  
Check that there are no cables near the cassette holder  
or top panel, and then press the EJECT button to open  
the cassette holder.  
3
When a lens with an extender has been installed, set the  
extender to the operating position, and check that it  
works properly.  
7
After checking the following points, insert the cassette  
tape and close the cassette holder.  
4
≥The cassette tape must not be set to the accidental  
erasure prevention mode.  
≥There must be no tape slack.  
≥The tape must be free from condensation.  
3, 4  
90  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
2. Automatic audio level adjustment function  
6-1-3 Inspecting the VTR unit  
inspection  
Perform all the steps outlined in section “1. Tape travel  
inspection” through section “4. Earphone and speaker  
inspection” one after the other.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switch to AUTO.  
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to FRONT.  
1. Tape travel inspection  
Point the microphone connected to the MIC IN jack at a  
suitable sound source, and check that the changes in  
the level displays for both CH1 and CH2 reflect the  
changes in the strength of the sound.  
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE, and check  
that the SAVE lamp inside the viewfinder lights.  
1
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY, and check  
that the SAVE lamp goes off.  
2
3. Manual audio level adjustment function  
inspection  
Set the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to FRONT.  
1
6
Set the DISPLAY switch to CTL.  
4
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switch to MAN.  
2
Press the unit’s REC START button, and check that:  
5
≥The tape reels rotate.  
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.  
Check that when they are turned clockwise, the level  
displays increase.  
3
≥The figure shown on the counter display changes.  
≥The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights.  
≥The RF and SERVO displays do not appear in the  
display window.  
4. Earphone and speaker inspection  
Press the unit’s REC START button again. Check that  
6
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY.  
the tape stops and the REC lamp inside the viewfinder  
goes off.  
1
Turn the MONITOR control, and check that the speaker  
volume changes.  
2
Use the lens VTR button to check the same operations  
as in steps 5 and 6.  
7
Connect the earphones to the PHONES jack.  
Check that the sound from the speaker is muted, and  
that the microphone’s sound is heard in the earphones.  
3
Press the RESET button, and check that “00:00:00:00”  
appears on the counter display.  
8
Set the LIGHT switch to ON, and check that the display  
window illuminates.  
Turn the MONITOR control, and check that the  
earphone volume changes.  
9
4
Press the REW button, and after the tape has been  
rewound for a few seconds, press the PLAY/PAUSE  
button.  
10  
Check that the tape is recorded, played back and  
rewound properly.  
Press the FF button, and check that the tape is fast  
forwarded properly.  
11  
91  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
5. Inspection using external microphones  
6-1-4 Self-diagnosis function  
Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1  
and CH2 jacks.  
1
Simplified checks can be undertaken on the unit’s system at  
such times when, for instance, a color video monitor is not  
available.  
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to REAR.  
Perform menu operations to open the <SYSTEM CHECK>  
from the MAINTENANCE page. Check the camera output  
level setting under the COLOR CHECK item.  
2
3
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the back  
panel to MIC or +48V in accordance with the external  
mic’s power supply type.  
#
< SYSTEM CHECK >  
COLOR CHECK :OFF  
MIC : Internal power supply mic.  
+48V: External power supply mic.  
Point the microphones at the sound source, and check  
that the changes in the audio levels displayed on the  
audio level meter of the display window and in the  
viewfinder reflect the changes in the strength of the  
sound.  
4
Y: 0%  
R: 0%  
G: 0%  
B: 0%  
This inspection can also be performed for each channel  
by connecting one of the microphones to each channel  
in turn.  
6. Inspections relating to the time code and user  
bits  
Set the user bits as required.  
For details on the setting procedure, refer to “4-5-1  
Setting the user bits.”  
1
Set the time code.  
For details on the setting procedure, refer to “4-5-3  
Setting the time code.”  
2
Set the TCG switch to R-RUN.  
3
Press the REC START button.  
Check that the figure on the counter display changes as  
the tape travels.  
4
Press the REC START button again.  
Check that the tape stops and the figure shown on the  
counter display stops changing.  
5
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN.  
Check that the figure on the counter display changes  
irrespective of the tape travel.  
6
Set the DISPLAY switch to UB.  
7
Check that pressing the HOLD button advances the  
display value through the sequence VTCG > DATE >  
TIME > no display (time zone) > TCG.  
92  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
6-2-5 Replacing the backup battery  
6-2 Maintenance  
The backup battery is already installed when the unit is  
shipped.  
6-2-1 Condensation  
When it has discharged, the “BACK UP BATT EMPTY”  
display appears for 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen when  
the POWER switch is set to ON.  
Moreover, the time code value of the TCG will be set to  
“00:00:00:00” and the backup of the time code value will no  
longer be possible: this means that the backup battery  
should be replaced.  
The water vapor in the air may form as tiny droplets on the  
head drum when the unit is moved from a cold location to a  
warm location or used in a very humid place. This  
phenomenon is known as condensation, and running the  
tape under these conditions is liable to cause the tape to  
stick to the drum.  
Note the following points:  
≥Remove the tape when the unit’s operation is to be started  
in conditions where condensation may form.  
Consult with your dealer, and replace the spent battery with  
a new battery (CR2032).  
≥Before loading the tape, set the power switch to ON, and  
check that the HUMID display is not lighted in the display  
window.  
<Note>  
6
For safety reasons, the HUMID display will flash and the  
drum will rotate for 80 minutes after condensation detection  
is released.  
During this time, the operation buttons cannot be operated.  
6-2-2 Head cleaning  
Use the AJ-CL12MP cleaning cassette if the heads need to  
be cleaned.  
Take care to read the instructions  
accompanying the cleaning tape since the video heads may  
be damaged if the tape is not used in the correct way.  
6-2-3 Cleaning inside the viewfinder  
≥Do not use thinners or any other solvent to remove dirt.  
≥Use a lens cleaner available on the market to wipe the  
lens.  
≥NEVER wipe the mirror.  
If dirt or dust has found its way onto the mirror, remove it  
using an air blower at retail outlets.  
6-2-4 Phenomena inherent to CCD  
cameras  
Smear  
This phenomenon may occur when very bright subjects are  
shot.  
This phenomenon is more conspicuous when the electronic  
shutter speed is faster.  
White dot defects  
For shooting in a high temperature environment using the DS  
GAIN, red, green, or blue dots may appear on the screen.  
Adjust the DS. GAIN and the S. GAIN in accordance with the  
operating environment.  
93  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
6-2-6 Connectors and signals  
AUDIO IN  
GND  
AUDIO IN(H)  
AUDIO IN(C)  
DC IN  
GND  
NC  
NC  
+12V  
DC OUT  
GND  
R TALLY  
(Open collector)  
REC START SW  
(Max. 1.5 A)  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
Matsushita part number K1AB103A0011  
3
4
Maker part number  
HA16PRM-3SG  
(Hirose Denki)  
Matsushita part number K1AA104H0038  
Maker part number  
HA16RX-4P (SW1)  
(Hirose Denki)  
+12V OUT  
PUSH  
Matsushita part number K1AY104J0002  
Maker part number  
HR10A-7R-4S (74)  
(Hirose Denki)  
4
3
2
2
1
Connector at the cable side  
Maker part number  
HR10A-7R-4P (73)  
(Hirose Denki)  
3
1
<Note>  
Ensure that the polarities are used  
correctly for a power supply from an  
external source.  
1
4
3
2
AUDIO OUT  
GND  
L CH OUT (H)  
L CH OUT (C)  
R CH OUT (H)  
R CH OUT (C)  
FRONT MIC IN  
GND  
L CH IN(H)  
L CH IN(C)  
R CH IN(H)  
R CH IN(C)  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Matsushita part number K1AB105B0002  
Maker part number  
HA16RD-5P (76)  
(Hirose Denki)  
Maker part number  
NC5FBH  
(NEUTRIK)  
PUSH  
1
5
4
2
3
5
1
2
4
3
94  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
Maker part number  
HR10A-10R-10SC (71)  
(Hirose Denki)  
REMOTE  
1
2
3
4
5
CAM DATA (H)  
CAM DATA (C)  
CAM CONT (H)  
CAM CONT (C)  
RC-ON  
Data from the camera to the remote control (H)  
Data from the camera to the remote control (C)  
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (H)  
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (C)  
Connector at the cable side  
Maker part number  
HR10A-10P-10P(73)  
(Hirose Denki)  
8
1
Identification signals of the remote control  
Low: ON  
7
6
2
9
10  
3
6
7
8
9
RC VIDEO OUT  
RC VIDEO GND  
NC  
Video signals output to the remote control  
GND of the video signals to the remote control  
Not used  
4
5
UNREG 12V  
DC +12 V power supply (AJ-RC10G: Max. 0.75 A)  
GND  
6
10 GND  
Matsushita part number K1AB120H0001  
VF  
Maker part number  
HR12-14RA-20SC  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UNREG-12V  
DC +12 V power supply (AJ-HVF21G: About 0.35 A)  
DC +12 V power supply  
UNREG-12V  
A9.0V  
DC +9 V power supply (not used)  
GND for the viewfinder PB signals  
GND for the viewfinder PR signals  
Viewfinder Y signals output  
1
6
11  
16  
2
7
12  
17  
3
8
13  
18  
4
5
10  
15  
20  
VF-PB-GND  
VF-PR-GND  
VF-Y  
9
14  
19  
VF-Y-GND  
VF-CLK  
GND for the viewfinder Y signals  
Serial data clock pulse signals  
VF-WR  
Pulse signals for reading serial-parallel conversion  
data  
10 VF-DATA  
11 UNREG-GND  
12 ZEBRA-SW  
13 PEAKING  
14 SPARE  
Serial data signals for serial-parallel conversion  
GND  
ON/OFF of the zebra signals  
Control of the peaking (not used)  
Standby (not used)  
15 VF-PR  
Viewfinder PR signal output  
Viewfinder PB signal output  
ON/OFF of the marker (not used)  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL adjustment (not used)  
GND for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (not used)  
GND  
16 VF-PB  
17 MARKER-SW  
18 FRONT-VR  
19 VR-GND  
20 UNREG-GND  
Caution:  
Total amount of current from the respective connectors for DC OUT, REMOTE, VF,  
and LENS should not exceed 2.5 A.  
95  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
Maker part number  
HR10A-10R-12SC(71)  
(Hirose Denki)  
LENS  
1
RET-SW  
ON/OFF of the return video  
RETURN ON: GND  
9
8
1
RETURN OFF: OPEN  
10  
5
2
3
2
REC-START/STOP  
Control for recording start/stop  
11  
12  
7
+5 V  
6
4
0 V  
START STOP START  
3
4
GND  
GND  
IRIS-AUTO  
ON/OFF of the forced iris servo  
SERVO ON: +5 V 0.5 V  
SERVO OFF: OPEN  
5
IRIS-CONT  
Control output for the lens iris  
F2.8: –6.2 V, F16: +3.4 V, CLOSE: +2.5 V  
6
7
UNREG-12V  
IRIS-POSI  
+12V power supply for the lens (Max. 1.5 A)  
Iris position signals  
3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)  
8
9
IRIS-G-MAX  
EXT-POSI  
IRIS REMOTE/LOCAL (AUTO) signals  
REMOTE:  
+5 V 0.5 V  
LOCAL (AUTO):GND  
ON/OFF of the built-in extender  
EXTENDER ON: GND  
EXTENDER OFF: OPEN  
10 ZOOM-POSI  
11 FOCUS-POSI  
12 SPARE  
Zoom position signals  
Focus position signals  
Standby (not used)  
Maker part number  
HR10A-7R-6SC(73)  
(Hirose Denki)  
GPS  
1
2
3
GPS TXA  
GPS RXA  
GPS VBAT  
Transmission data from the GPS unit to the camera  
Transmission data from the camera to the GPS unit  
6
4
1
2
3
Backup power supply connector for the GPS unit  
(DC+3.3 V)  
5
4
5
6
REC START SW  
GPS VCC  
Control signals of REC start/stop  
Power supply connector for the GPS unit (DC+3.3 V)  
GND  
GPS GND  
96  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
Maker part number  
HDBB-25S (05)  
(Hirose Denki)  
Unislot Interface  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CH-1 SHIELD  
CH-1 HOT  
CH-1 COLD  
GND  
GND  
13  
25  
1
Audio input from the wireless receiver: HOT  
14  
Audio input from the wireless receiver: COLD  
GND  
+12V UNREG  
RX ON  
Power supply to the wireless receiver  
Power supply remote output to the wireless receiver  
RF WARN  
RM5  
RF warning input from the wireless receiver  
Not used  
RM4  
Not used  
10 SPARE 1  
Not used  
6
11 SPARE 2  
Not used  
12 EXT CLK  
Not used  
13 CLK SHIELD  
14 CH-2 SHIELD  
15 CH-2 HOT  
16 CH-2 COLD  
17 +5.6V  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Power supply to the wireless receiver  
Not used  
18 VIDEO OUT  
19 VIDEO RET  
20 VIDEO EN  
21 RM 1 (RM CLK)  
22 RM 2 (RM DATA)  
23 RM 3 (RM WR)  
24 RM +5V  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
25 RM GND  
Not used  
97  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
6-3 Warning system  
6-3-1 Warning description tables  
When an error or a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on or while an operation is underway, the  
WARNING lamp and lamps inside the viewfinder serve to alert the user.  
<Note>  
Items are displayed in the following sequence of priority: WARNING lamp > tally lamp > warnings inside the viewfinder. The  
display accords with this sequence when more than one error has occurred at the same time. However, WIRELESS RF may  
not be displayed depending on the menu setting selected.  
1. SLACK  
4. REC WARNING  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
“SLACK” appears and an error code flashes.  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
The code 11 display lights.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Flashes four times a second.  
Flashes four times a second.  
“SLACK” appears and an error code lights up.  
Sounds continuously.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Alarm  
Flashes four times a second (for at least 3  
seconds during recording).  
Flashes four times a second (for at least 3  
seconds during recording).  
Viewfinder  
Alarm  
REC WARNING display flashes (for at least 3  
seconds during recording).  
Warning description  
Motor, solenoid or other mechanism-related  
trouble, etc.  
Sounds four times a second (for at least 3  
seconds during recording).  
VTR unit operation  
Corrective action  
Operation is stopped. Power is turned off if  
solenoid trouble has been detected.  
Warning description  
VTR unit operation  
Problem with the recording control signal.  
Check “6-3-2 Error codes,” and consult your  
dealer.  
Recording continues but the signals may not be  
recorded correctly while the warning remains  
displayed.  
Corrective action  
Rewind the tape or replace the cassette tape.  
2. BATTERY END  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
The bar display that shows the remaining battery  
charge starts flashing.  
5. HUMID  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Lights.  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
“HUMID” display lights if condensation is  
detected.  
Flashes once a second.  
BATT LED lights.  
“HUMID” display flashes for an additional 10 to  
90 minutes after condensation detection is  
canceled.  
Viewfinder  
Alarm  
Sounds continuously.  
The battery charge is now depleted.  
Warning description  
VTR unit operation  
WARNING lamp  
Lights for 90 minutes following the release of the  
condensation detection after the condensation  
formation was detected.  
All operations are stopped, and the tape is  
unloaded. Only cassette tape eject is accepted.  
Corrective action  
Replace the battery.  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Flashes 4 times per second for 90 minutes after  
condensation detection is canceled.  
“HUMID” display flashes from the time  
condensation is detected until 90 minutes after  
the condensation detection is released.  
3. TAPE END  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
The bar display that shows the remaining tape  
amount starts flashing.  
Alarm  
Sounds continuously (4 times a second during  
recording).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Lights (during stop and standby OFF).  
Warning description  
VTR unit operation  
Condensation has formed.  
Flashes four times a second (during stop and  
standby OFF).  
The recording operation continues but if the tape  
sticks, recording will stop.  
For 80 minutes after the condensation detection  
is released, the drum is rotated and no  
operations are accepted.  
=
Viewfinder  
Alarm  
“
END” flashes (during stop and standby  
OFF).  
Sounds continuously (during stop and standby  
OFF).  
Corrective action  
Stop the tape travel and turn off the power. If the  
“HUMID” display fails to be cleared even when  
the power is turned back on, wait until it clears.  
Warning description  
VTR unit operation  
The tape has come to its end.  
Operation is stopped during recording, playback  
and fast forwarding.  
Corrective action  
Rewind the tape or replace the cassette tape.  
98  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
6. SERVO  
9. BATTERY NEAR END  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
“SERVO” display lights (during recording and  
playback).  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
The bar display that shows the remaining battery  
charge starts flashing.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Alarm  
Flashes four times a second (during recording  
and playback).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Flashes once a second.  
Flashes once a second.  
Flashes four times a second (during recording  
and playback).  
Viewfinder  
BATT LED starts flashing.  
Alarm  
Sounds four times a second.  
The battery charge is nearly depleted.  
Operation continues.  
“SERVO” display lights (during recording and  
playback).  
Warning description  
VTR unit operation  
Corrective action  
Sounds four times a second (during recording  
and playback).  
Replace the battery when it becomes necessary.  
Warning description  
VTR unit operation  
The servo is disturbed.  
Operation continues but the unit may not operate  
correctly.  
10. TAPE NEAR END  
Corrective action  
Turn off the power and consult your dealer. The  
warning display may flash for a moment and then  
disappear when tape transport commences: this  
is normal and not indicative of a failure or  
malfunctioning.  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
The bar display that shows the remaining tape  
amount starts flashing.  
6
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Flashes once a second (during recording).  
Flashes once a second (during recording).  
Viewfinder  
≥The remaining tape display starts flashing (in  
the EE mode).  
7. RF  
=
≥“ ” flashes for 3 seconds one minute before  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
“RF” display flashes (during standby and  
recording).  
the tape reaches the end.  
Alarm  
Sounds once a second.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Flashes four times a second (during recording).  
Flashes four times a second (during recording).  
“RF” display lights (during recording).  
Warning description  
The tape is close to its end (about 2 minutes  
remain).  
Viewfinder  
VTR unit operation  
Corrective action  
Operation continues.  
Alarm  
Sounds four times a second (during recording).  
Replace the cassette tape when it becomes  
necessary.  
Warning description  
The video heads have become clogged. There  
is a problem in the video system.  
VTR unit operation  
The cleaning rollers are activated to clean the  
heads (for a maximum of 3 seconds).  
11. 1394  
Recording continues but the signals may not be  
recorded correctly.  
The indications on LCD screen are retained until  
the REC/PAUSE status is established. They go  
off as soon as the unit transfers from the  
REC/PAUSE mode to another mode.  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
“1394 E-22” display flashes.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Flashes four times a second.  
Flashes four times a second.  
Corrective action  
Clean the heads. If the signals cannot be  
recorded correctly even after cleaning, consult  
your dealer.  
Viewfinder  
When error code 92 appears, “1394 INITIAL  
ERROR” display lights (during standby).  
Alarm  
Sounds four times a second.  
Warning description  
There is something wrong with the signals  
supplied to the DVCPRO connector.  
8. WIRELESS RF  
VTR unit operation  
Corrective action  
Operation continues, but something is wrong with  
the signals supplied to the DVCPRO connector.  
Indications on LCD  
screen  
No indication  
WARNING lamp  
Flashes four times a second (during standby and  
recording).  
Check the IEEE 1394 cable and DVCPRO  
connector connections and the settings of the  
external units or menu settings, and then turn the  
power off and back on.  
If the warning display is not cleared, check “6-3-2  
Error codes,” and consult your dealer.  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Flashes four times a second (during recording).  
“WIRELESS RF” display lights for at least 3  
seconds during recording.  
Alarm  
Sounds four times a second (for at least 3  
seconds during standby and recording).  
Warning description  
VTR unit operation  
Poor wireless signal reception.  
Operation continues but the signals from the  
wireless microphone cannot be received.  
Corrective action  
Check the microphone’s power supply and the  
reception condition of the receiver.  
99  
Chapter 6 Maintenance and inspections (continued)  
6-3-2 Error codes  
One of the following error codes appears in the display  
window when an error has occurred in the unit for some  
reason.  
Code No.  
Description of error  
When an error code appears, consult your dealer.  
E-04  
E-08  
Pinch solenoid problem  
Cleaning solenoid problem  
Supply reel problem  
E-0B 22  
E-0C 22  
E-0D 22  
E-0E 22  
E-0F 22  
E-38  
Take-up reel problem  
Capstan problem  
Cylinder problem  
Loading problem  
Servo transmission problem  
Camera transmission problem  
Reference signal problem  
Video initialization problem  
E-3F  
E-6F  
E-11  
E-50  
System format problem  
O Turn the power supply on again.  
E-92  
Something is wrong with the DVCPRO connector  
connection.  
O Details of the error are displayed as a numerical value in the 22 part.  
This information is for analyzing the trouble.  
6-3-3 Emergency eject  
If the cassette cannot be ejected by pressing the EJECT button, use a screwdriver or similar tool to press and turn the  
emergency eject screw. This enables the cassette to be removed.  
Set the power to OFF.  
Cassette holder  
1
2
Remove the rubber cap where shown in the figure.  
Insert a Phillips head screwdriver into the cross-shaped  
part of the emergency eject screw (red).  
While pushing in with the screwdriver, turn the  
emergency eject screw counterclockwise until the tape is  
ejected.  
3
Emergency  
eject screw  
≥This screw needs to be rotated through about 20 turns  
after the first turn until the unloading can be started.  
≥It also needs to be rotated through about 90 turns after  
the first turn until the tape is ejected.  
2, 5  
Remove the cassette.  
4
5
Push in and turn at  
the same time.  
3
Return the rubber cap to its original position.  
<Notes>  
≥Do not turn the emergency eject screw except in an  
emergency.  
≥Do not turn the screw clockwise. Stop turning the  
screw as soon as the tape is ejected. Otherwise, the  
mechanism may be damaged.  
≥After the tape is ejected, the cassette holder will not lock  
into place even when an attempt is made to close it. Be  
sure to turn the power off and turn it back on to reset the  
mechanism’s operation, and then close the cassette  
holder.  
≥A clicking sound will be heard when the emergency eject  
screw is turned: this sound is made by the reel drive  
operation and is therefore not indicative of a malfunction.  
100  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables  
7-1 Menu configuration  
MENU  
Items selected in <USER MENU SELECT>  
USER MENU  
SYSTEM SETTING  
PAINT  
SYSTEM MODE  
MAIN MENU  
REC FUNCTION  
OUTPUT SEL  
RB GAIN CONTROL  
RGB BLACK CONTROL  
MATRIX  
COLOR CORRECTION  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ADDITIONAL DTL  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
VIDEO OUT SETTING  
MONITOR OUT SETTING  
RC OUT SETTING  
DOWNCON SETTING  
GENLOCK  
OPTION MENU  
OPTION  
OPTION MODE  
GAMMA  
CAMERA SETTING  
VF  
VF DISPLAY  
VF MARKER  
VF USER BOX  
VF INDICATOR1  
VF INDICATOR2  
MODE CHECK IND  
!LED  
OPERATION  
CAMERA ID  
7
SHUTTER SPEED  
SHUTTER SELECT  
USER SW  
SW MODE  
WHITE BALANCE MODE  
USER SW GAIN  
LENS IRIS  
FILE  
CARD READ/WRITE  
CARD R/W SELECT  
LENS FILE  
How to open the menus  
MAINTENANCE  
SYSTEM CHECK  
DIAGNOSTIC  
USER MENU:  
Press MENU button to display.  
LENS FILE CARD R/W  
SCENE  
LENS ADJ  
BLACK SHADING  
WHITE SHADING  
LENS FILE ADJ  
INITIALIZE  
MAIN MENU:  
Hold down MENU button for 3  
seconds or more to display.  
VTR MENU  
VTR FUNCTION  
BATTERY/TAPE  
BATTERY SETTING1  
BATTERY SETTING2  
MIC/AUDIO 1  
OPTION MENU:  
USER MENU SELECT  
SYSTEM(USER)  
PAINT(USER)  
Press MENU button while  
holding down LIGHT button to  
display.  
VF(USER)  
OPERATION(USER)  
FILE(USER)  
MAINTENANCE(USER)  
VTR(USER)  
MIC/AUDIO 2  
TC/UB  
UMID SET/INFO  
VTR DIAG  
<Notes>  
≥There is a total of 42 camera-related items on three pages (14 items per page) and 14 VTR-related items on one page  
which can be set.  
≥The items with the shading cannot be selected using <USER MENU SELECT>.  
≥The items with the underlining can be selected only using <USER MENU SELECT> on condition that all the items  
(equivalent to the number of items on one page) are selected together. Individual items cannot be selected.  
How to interpret the menu lists  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
The following abbreviations indicate whether the menu changes are stored  
(written) in the corresponding data or loaded (read) from the data.  
The changes cannot be stored or loaded when “/” is indicated.  
SYSTEM MODE  
1080-50i  
1080-59.94i  
720-50P  
For setting the system frequency and the  
recording format of the unit.  
When this item is switched, turn “OFF” the  
POWER switch on the unit and then turn it  
“ON” again.  
720-59.94P  
S: The changes can be stored or loaded as scene file data.  
C: The changes can be stored or loaded using CARD READ/WRITE.  
U: The changes can be stored or loaded as user data.  
Refer to sections “7-6-4 SCENE” and “7-6-5 INITIALIZE.”  
F: The changes can be stored or loaded as READ FACTORY DATA.  
Refer to section “7-6-5 INITIALIZE.”  
R: The changes can be stored or loaded using RC DATA SAVE.  
Refer to section “5-10 Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-  
RC10G).”  
C U F  
This column indicates the  
variable range in which the  
item can be set and the  
choice of the settings which  
can be selected for the item.  
Described in this column are the  
operations which can be expected to  
result when the item’s settings are  
selected.  
101  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-2 SYSTEM SETTING  
7-2-1 SYSTEM MODE  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Variable  
range  
REC TIME  
For 59.94 Hz  
For setting the recording time (one cut).  
O When the CAMERA MODE item is set to  
24P or 24PA, the value is set in  
increments of 5 frames (rounded down).  
(Minimum value: 00s05f)  
Item  
Remarks  
00s01f  
:
SYSTEM MODE  
For AJ-HDX900E  
For AJ-HDX900P  
For setting the system frequency and the  
recording format of the unit.  
When this item is switched, turn “OFF” the  
POWER switch on the unit and then turn it  
“ON” again.  
O When the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)  
is connected, this item is not displayed.  
To switch this item, operate the main unit  
independently.  
59s29f  
1080-50i  
1080-59.94i  
720-50P  
00s01f  
For 50 Hz  
:
59s24f  
720-59.94P  
C U F  
PAUSE TIME  
For 59.94 Hz  
For setting the recording pause time.  
00h00m00s01f O When the CAMERA MODE item is set to  
:
24P or 24PA, the value is set in  
increments of 5 frames (rounded down).  
(Minimum value: 00h00m00s05f)  
C U F  
00h04m59s29f  
:
CAMERA MODE  
For AJ-HDX900E  
(1080-50i)  
50i  
For setting the video system for shooting.  
23h59m59s29f  
25P  
(1080-59.94i)  
60i  
For 50 Hz  
00h00m00s01f  
:
00h04m59s24f  
For AJ-HDX900P  
:
30P  
24P  
24PA  
(720-50P)  
50P  
23h59m59s24f  
C U F  
TAKE TOTAL TIME NONE  
For setting the time required for shooting.  
:
Select  
a
setting from NONE (shooting  
5day  
continues until it is stopped manually) to  
5DAY (5 days).  
C U F  
25P  
(720-59.94P)  
60P  
30P  
TOTAL REC TIME  
00m00s01f  
For displaying the total recording time. The  
setting for this time cannot be changed.  
The total time yielded by adding the REC  
TIME, PAUSE TIME and TOTAL TAKE  
TIME is displayed.  
O This indication is just a guide for the  
recording time. It is impossible to record  
for a period longer than the recording time  
of the tape.  
:
99m59s29f  
OVER  
100min  
NONE  
24P  
C U F R  
<Note>  
If the SYSTEM MODE item is changed while the time code is  
advanced in the free-run mode (the TCG switch is set to the  
F-RUN position.), the time code may not record properly.  
When the SYTEM MODE item is changed and the power of  
the unit is turned on again, check the time code and set it  
again if necessary.  
AUDIO REC  
OFF  
ON  
For setting the availability of audio records  
during INTERVAL REC.  
C U F  
START DELAY  
0SEC  
For setting the time taken until recording is  
to start after the REC START button is  
pressed in the INTERVAL REC mode.  
:
10SEC  
C U F  
PRE REC MODE  
OFF  
ON  
For setting the PRE RECORDING function.  
OFF: Recording starts about 0.4 seconds  
after pressing the REC START button  
or the VTR button on the lens.  
7-2-2 REC FUNCTION  
ON: The PRE RECORDING function is  
activated.  
For details, refer to “3-4 To record video  
signals of a few seconds before starting  
recording (PRE-RECORDING function).”  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
C U F  
INTERVAL REC  
MODE  
ON  
ONE SHOT  
OFF  
For setting the INTERVAL REC function.  
ON:  
For executing the interval recording.  
It is possible to record in intervals in  
increments of one frame.  
PRE REC TIME  
0SEC  
For setting the length of time for which the  
video and audio signals can be recorded  
before the REC START button is pressed in  
PRE RECORDING.  
:
7SEC  
C U F  
ONE SHOT:  
RETAKE MODE  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the RETAKE function.  
ON: The RETAKE function is activated.  
OFF: The RETAKE function is not activated.  
It returns to OFF once the power is turned  
off.  
Recording is performed only once for the  
time set in the REC TIME item, after  
which it stops.  
OFF:  
Interval recording is not performed.  
For details, refer to “3-5 Recording in  
intervals (INTERVAL REC function).”  
For details, refer to “3-6 To take the previous  
cut again (RETAKE function).”  
F
C U F  
INTERVAL REC  
HOLD  
ON  
OFF  
For setting whether the settings in the  
INTERVAL REC MODE item are retained or  
released, when the power is turned OFF.  
ON: For retaining the settings in the  
INTERVAL REC MODE item.  
OFF: For releasing the settings in the  
INTERVAL REC MODE item.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
102  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-2-3 OUTPUT SEL  
7-2-4 VIDEO OUT SETTING  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
OUTPUT ITEM  
MENU  
ONLY  
TC  
For setting the characters superimposed on  
the output signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
VIDEO OUT  
CENTR MARK  
OFF  
For setting the center marker to be  
superimposed on the output signals of the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
1
2
3
4
STATUS  
MENU ONLY:  
OFF: The center marker is not displayed.  
The menu screen is superimposed only  
when the menu is accessed. This  
normally displays nothing.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Center blank (large)  
+ (small)  
TC:  
Center blank (small)  
C U F R  
Time codes are superimposed (when the  
menu is accessed, the menu screen is  
superimposed.)  
VIDEO OUT  
SAFETY MARK  
OFF  
1
2
For setting the type of safety marker frame  
to be superimposed on the output signals of  
the VIDEO OUT connector.  
OFF: The safety marker frame is not  
displayed.  
STATUS:  
The characters that are the same as the  
characters  
superimposed  
in  
the  
1:  
Box  
viewfinder screen are superimposed.  
(When the menu is accessed, the menu  
screen is superimposed.)  
7
For details, refer to “4-8-1 Settings of signals  
output from VIDEO OUT connector.”  
C U F  
2:  
Corner frames  
MONI OUT  
HD-SDI  
HD-Y  
For setting video signals output from the  
MON OUT connector.  
HD-SDI:  
C U F R  
For outputting the HD SDI signals  
HD-Y:  
SAFETY AREA  
80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%  
with a fixed ratio between of width and  
height.  
:
For outputting the analog HD-Y signals  
For details, refer to “4-8-2 Settings of signals  
output from MON OUT connector.”  
90%  
:
100%  
C U F R  
C U F  
VIDEO OUT FRM  
MARK  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the frame marker on the  
output signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
MONI OUT CHARA ON  
OFF  
For superimposing characters on the HD  
SDI output signals from the MON OUT  
connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
<Note>  
C U F R  
FRM SIG  
4:3  
For setting the frame marker.  
The VISTA setting is 16:8.65.  
This does not link with the VIDEO OUT  
CHARACTER switch.  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
C U F  
C U F R  
MONI OUT MODE  
CAM  
VTR  
For switching the signals output from the  
MON OUT connector.  
CAM: The camera images are output at all  
times.  
VTR: In the recording or other EE mode,  
camera images are output from the  
connector; in playback mode, the  
VTR’s playback signals are output.  
VIDEO OUT USER  
BOX  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the user box on the  
output signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
O It is not superimposed when the VIDEO  
OUT switch is set to the SD-SDI or VBS  
position.  
C U F  
C U F R  
VF MODE  
CAM  
VTR  
For switching the display mode of the  
viewfinder screen.  
CAM: The camera images are output at all  
times.  
VTR: In the recording or other EE mode,  
camera images are displayed; in  
playback mode, the VTR’s playback  
images are displayed.  
USER BOX WIDTH  
1
For setting the horizontal width of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
100  
C U F R  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
For setting the vertical height of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
C U F  
100  
C U F R  
USER BOX H POS  
–50  
For setting the horizontal position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
C U F R  
USER BOX V POS  
–50  
For setting the vertical position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
C U F R  
O The user box can be displayed in any position as a box-  
type cursor.  
O When the DOWNCON MODE item on the DOWNCON  
SETTING screen is set to LT-BOX or S-CROP, the frame  
marker and the safety marker are not displayed.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
103  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-2-5 MONITOR OUT SETTING  
7-2-6 RC OUT SETTING  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MONI OUT CENTR OFF  
For setting the center marker to be  
superimposed on the HD SDI output signals  
of the MON OUT connector.  
RC OUT CENTR  
MARK  
OFF  
For setting the center marker to be  
superimposed on the output signals of the  
REMOTE connector.  
MARK  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF: The center marker is not displayed.  
OFF: The center marker is not displayed.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Center blank (large)  
+ (small)  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Center blank (large)  
+ (small)  
Center blank (small)  
Center blank (small)  
C U F R  
C U F R  
MONI OUT  
OFF  
For setting the type of the safety marker  
frame to be superimposed on the HD SDI  
output signals of the MON OUT connector.  
OFF: The safety marker frame is not  
displayed.  
RC OUT SAFETY  
MARK  
OFF  
1
2
For setting the type of the safety marker  
frame to be superimposed on the output  
signals of the REMOTE connector.  
OFF: The safety marker frame is not  
displayed.  
SAFETY MARK  
1
2
1:  
Box  
1:  
Box  
2:  
Corner frames  
2:  
Corner frames  
C U F R  
C U F R  
SAFETY AREA  
80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%  
with a fixed ratio between of width and  
height.  
:
SAFETY AREA  
80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%  
with a fixed ratio between of width and  
height.  
:
90%  
:
90%  
:
100%  
C U F R  
100%  
MONI OUT FRM  
MARK  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the frame marker on the  
HD SDI output signals from the MON OUT  
connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
C U F R  
RC OUT FRM  
MARK  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the frame marker on the  
output signals from the REMOTE connector.  
ON: To superimpose  
C U F R  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
FRM SIG  
4:3  
For setting the frame marker.  
The VISTA setting is 16:8.65.  
C U F R  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
FRM SIG  
4:3  
For setting the frame marker.  
The VISTA setting is 16:8.65.  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
C U F R  
MONI OUT USER  
BOX  
ON  
OFF  
For superimposing the user box on the HD  
SDI output signals from the MON OUT  
connector.  
C U F R  
ON: To superimpose  
OFF: Not to superimpose  
<Notes>  
C U F R  
O Settings in the SAFETY AERA item and the FRM SIG  
item are interlinked with the respective connectors of  
VIDEO OUT, MON OUT, and REMOTE.  
USER BOX WIDTH  
1
For setting the horizontal width of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
O Settings in the respective items of USER BOX WIDTH,  
USER BOX HEIGHT, USER BOX H POS, and USER  
BOX V POS are interlinked with the VIDEO OUT  
connector and the MON OUT connector.  
100  
C U F R  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
For setting the vertical height of the user  
box.  
:
13  
:
100  
C U F R  
USER BOX H POS  
–50  
For setting the horizontal position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
C U F R  
USER BOX V POS  
–50  
For setting the vertical position of the user  
box center.  
:
+00  
:
+50  
C U F R  
O The user box can be displayed in any position as a box-  
type cursor.  
O When the DOWNCON MODE item on the DOWNCON  
SETTING screen is set to LT-BOX or S-CROP, the frame  
marker and the safety marker are not displayed.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
104  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-2-7 DOWNCON SETTING  
7-2-8 GENLOCK  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
DOWNCON MODE SQUEEZ  
LT-BOX  
For setting the mode of the down converter  
output signals.  
GENLOCK  
INT  
EXT  
For setting the standard signals for  
executing the GENLOCK.  
S-CROP  
INT: For synchronizing to the standard  
signal within the unit regardless of the  
signals that are input in the GENLOCK  
IN connector.  
C U F R  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the detail function for the down  
converter output signals ON/OFF.  
EXT: For synchronizing to the standard  
signals that are input in the GENLOCK  
IN connector.  
The down converter output signals contain  
detailed components that are set during HD  
signal processing. In this setting, these  
signals overlap the detailed components  
dedicated to the down converter outputs.  
Even if this setting is turned off, it is  
impossible to turn off the detailed  
components set during HD signal  
processing.  
C U F R  
GL PHASE  
HD SDI  
COMPOSIT  
For selecting the output signals that lock  
phases to the signals that are input in the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
HD SDI:  
For locking the HD SDI signals to the  
GENLOCK input.  
C U F R  
For the down converter output signals,  
the start position of the video delays by  
about 90 lines.  
7
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For setting the horizontal detail correction  
level for the down converter output signals.  
:
08  
:
COMPOSIT:  
31  
For locking the down converter output  
signals to the GENLOCK input.  
For the HD SDI output signals, the start  
position of the video gains by about 90  
lines.  
C U F R  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For setting the vertical detail correction level  
for the down converter output signals.  
:
04  
:
C U F R  
31  
C U F R  
H PHASE COARSE –100  
For making coarse adjustment for aligning  
phases of the horizontal synchronization, for  
executing the GENLOCK.  
:
DTL CORING  
00  
For setting the noise elimination level of the  
details.  
+000  
01  
:
:
+100  
15  
C U F R  
H PHASE FINE  
–100  
For making fine adjustment for aligning  
phases of the horizontal synchronization, for  
executing the GENLOCK.  
:
H.DTL FREQ.  
1
For selecting the horizontal detail  
frequencies.  
:
+000  
:
3
:
1: 2.5 MHz  
2: 3 MHz  
4: 4 MHz  
5: 4.5 MHz  
+100  
5
3: 3.5 MHz  
C U F R  
2DLPF  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the 2-D low path filter reducing  
cross colors.  
ON: Cross colors are reduced.  
OFF: Cross colors are not reduced.  
C U F R  
SET UP  
For AJ-HDX900E  
For AJ-HDX900P  
For setting the setup level for the down  
converter output signals.  
<Note>  
0%  
7.5%  
When the system frequency is set to 50 Hz,  
the setup level will be 0%.  
C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
105  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-2-9 OPTION MODE  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
REC TALLY  
RED  
GREEN  
CHAR  
For selecting the method to access records  
on the unit when the unit is connected to  
peripheral devices and used remotely.  
RED:  
The red tally lamp lights.  
GREEN: The green tally lamp lights.  
CHAR: For displaying “REC” in the  
viewfinder.  
C U F  
P.OFF GPS DATA  
HOLD  
CLEAR  
For selecting whether or not to hold the  
UMID GPS position information while the  
power is off and record the information as  
the data still held as the previous value until  
another measurement can be taken after the  
power is next turned on.  
HOLD: The data is held and recorded.  
CLEAR: The data is cleared at the same  
time as the power is turned off, and  
all zeros (no information) are  
recorded from the time the power is  
turned on until the measurement is  
next taken.  
C U F  
1394 SPEED  
S200  
S400  
For setting the transfer rate of signals output  
from the DVCPRO connector.  
S200: 200 Mbps  
S400: 400 Mbps  
C U F  
1394 IN CH  
0
For setting the input channel of signals input  
to the DVCPRO connector.  
0 – 63: To fix to the designated value  
AUTO: To follow the settings of the  
externally connected devices  
:
63  
AUTO  
C U F  
1394 OUT CH  
0
For setting the input channel of signals  
output from the DVCPRO connector.  
0 – 63: To fix to the designated value  
AUTO: To follow the settings of the  
externally connected devices  
:
63  
AUTO  
C U F  
1394 CONTROL  
OFF  
BOTH  
For setting the control for recording  
start/stop operations of external devices that  
are connected to the DVCPRO connector.  
OFF: Do not control the externally  
connected devices.  
BOTH: To control both the unit and the  
externally connected devices  
C U F  
1394 CMD SEL  
REC_P  
STOP  
For setting the control of recording stop  
operations of the external devices that are  
connected to the DVCPRO connector.  
REC_P: Operation to pause recording  
STOP: Stopping operation  
C U F  
SDI METADATA  
ON  
OFF  
For setting metadata (UMID information) to  
output to the HD SDI signals.  
ON: To output  
OFF: Not to output  
C U F  
SDI EDH  
ON  
OFF  
For setting that the detection signals of the  
communication error is output to the HD SDI  
signals.  
ON: To output  
OFF: Not to output  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
106  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-3 PAINT  
7-3-1 RB GAIN CONTROL  
7-3-2 RGB BLACK CONTROL  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
R GAIN AWB PRE  
–200  
For setting the Rch gain when the WHITE  
BAL switch is in the PRST position.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
MASTER PED  
–200  
For setting the level of the master pedestal.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
:
+000  
+015  
:
:
+200  
+200  
S
U F R  
S C U F R  
R PEDESTAL  
–100  
For setting the pedestal level of the Rch.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
B GAIN AWB PRE  
–200  
For setting the Bch gain when the WHITE  
BAL switch is in the PRST position.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
+000  
:
+000  
:
+100  
S C U F R  
+200  
G PEDESTAL  
–100  
For setting the pedestal level of the Gch.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
S C U F R  
+000  
R GAIN AWB A  
–200  
For setting the Rch gain when the WHITE  
BAL switch is in the A position.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
:
+100  
+000  
S C U F R  
:
+200  
B PEDESTAL  
–100  
For setting the pedestal level of the Bch.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
7
+000  
S C U F R  
:
B GAIN AWB A  
–200  
For setting the Bch gain when the WHITE  
BAL switch is in the A position.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
+100  
:
S C U F R  
+000  
:
PEDESTAL  
OFFSET  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the pedestal levels of the Rch,  
the Gch and the Bch when the black balance  
is adjusted.  
ON: To retain the values set in the  
respective items of R PEDESTAL, G  
PEDESTAL, and B PEDESTAL  
+200  
S C U F R  
R GAIN AWB B  
–200  
For setting the Rch gain when the WHITE  
BAL switch is in the B position.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
+000  
:
OFF: The pedestal levels of the Rch, the  
Gch and the Bch are set to”0”.  
+200  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
R FLARE  
–100  
For adjusting the flare level of the Rch.  
Adjustment values in this item are added to  
the flare adjustment value that is adjusted on  
7-7-6 <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
B GAIN AWB B  
–200  
For setting the Bch gain when the WHITE  
BAL switch is in the B position.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
+000  
:
:
+000  
+100  
:
+200  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
AWB A GAIN  
OFFSET  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the values of the Rch gain and  
the Bch gain when the auto white balance is  
executed as the WHITE BAL switch is in the  
A position.  
G FLARE  
–100  
For adjusting the flare level of the Gch.  
Adjustment values in this item are added to  
the flare adjustment value that is adjusted on  
7-7-6 <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.  
:
+000  
:
+100  
ON: To retain the values set in the items of  
R GAIN AWB A and B GAIN AWB A  
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and the  
Bch gain is set to “0”.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
B FLARE  
–100  
For adjusting the flare level of the Bch.  
Adjustment values in this item are added to  
the flare adjustment value that is adjusted on  
7-7-6 <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.  
O If the remote control unit is connected,  
settings made from the menu are  
disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
:
AWB B GAIN  
OFFSET  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the values of the Rch gain and  
the Bch gain when the auto white balance is  
executed as the WHITE BAL switch is in the  
B position.  
ON: To retain the values set in the items of  
R GAIN AWB B and B GAIN AWB B  
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and the  
Bch gain is set to “0”.  
+000  
:
+100  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
107  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-3-3 MATRIX  
7-3-4 COLOR CORRECTION  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table for  
the linear matrix.  
R (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction of red.  
∫ MATRIX TABLE  
:
+00  
:
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
MATRIX R-G  
–63  
For performing the linear matrix adjustment.  
(red/green)  
:
R-Mg (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction between red and magenta.  
:
+00  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
MATRIX R-B  
–63  
For performing the linear matrix adjustment.  
(red/blue)  
:
Mg (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction of magenta.  
:
+00  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
MATRIX G-R  
–63  
For performing the linear matrix adjustment.  
(green/red)  
:
Mg-B (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction between magenta and blue.  
:
+00  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
MATRIX G-B  
–63  
For performing the linear matrix adjustment.  
(green/blue)  
:
B (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction of blue.  
:
+00  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
MATRIX B-R  
–63  
For performing the linear matrix adjustment.  
(blue/red)  
:
B-Cy (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction between blue and cyan.  
:
+00  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
MATRIX B-G  
–63  
For performing the linear matrix adjustment.  
(blue/green)  
:
Cy (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction of cyan.  
:
+00  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
OFF  
A
For selecting the color correction table when  
the GAIN switch is in the L position.  
∫ L MATRIX  
TABLE  
Cy-G (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction between cyan and green.  
:
B
+00  
S C U F R  
:
OFF  
A
For selecting the color correction table when  
the GAIN switch is in the M position.  
∫ M MATRIX  
TABLE  
+63  
S C U F R  
B
G (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction of green.  
S C U F R  
:
+00  
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table when  
the GAIN switch is in the H position.  
∫ H MATRIX  
TABLE  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
G-Yl (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction between green and yellow.  
:
+00  
<Note>  
:
Items with $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU SW ($) R/W menu items on the <CARD R/W  
SELECT> screen.  
Items without $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W menu item.  
+63  
S C U F R  
Yl (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction of yellow.  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
For details, refer to “7-6-2 CARD R/W SELECT.”  
Yl-R (SAT)  
–63  
For performing the color saturation  
correction between yellow and red.  
:
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
108  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-3-5 LOW SETTING  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
R (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction for red.  
–3dB  
For setting the master gain to –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,  
∫ MASTER GAIN  
:
:
12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27 or 30 dB.  
+00  
0dB  
:
:
+63  
30dB  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For performing the horizontal detail  
correction level setting.  
:
R-Mg (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction between  
red and magenta.  
:
10  
:
+00  
:
63  
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For performing the vertical detail correction  
level setting.  
:
Mg (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction for  
magenta.  
20  
:
:
+00  
31  
S C U F R  
:
+63  
DTL CORING  
00  
For performing the noise elimination level  
setting for detail.  
:
S C U F R  
01  
Mg-B (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction between  
magenta and blue.  
:
:
7
15  
S C U F R  
+00  
:
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
For performing the horizontal detail  
frequency selection.  
Approximate peak frequencies  
+63  
:
S C U F R  
18  
:
B (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction for blue.  
:
31  
0: 9 MHz  
20: 12 MHz  
10: 10 MHz  
30: 15 MHz  
+00  
S C U F R  
:
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.  
+63  
S C U F R  
1
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details of  
dark sections are compressed.  
If the numerical value is larger, details of  
bright sections are also compressed.  
:
B-Cy (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction between  
blue and cyan.  
5
:
+00  
:
S C U F R  
+63  
S C U F R  
MASTER GAMMA  
0.30  
For setting the master gamma.  
(0.01 step)  
:
Cy (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction for cyan.  
0.45  
:
:
+00  
0.75  
S C U F R  
:
+63  
BLACK GAMMA  
–3  
For setting the gamma curve for the dark  
portion.  
–3 to –1:  
The dark portion is compressed.  
OFF:  
:
S C U F R  
OFF  
Cy-G (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction between  
cyan and green.  
:
:
+3  
+00  
:
+63  
Standard state  
+1 to +3:  
S C U F R  
G (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction for green.  
The dark portion is extended.  
:
S C U F R  
+00  
:
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table for  
the linear matrix.  
∫ MATRIX TABLE  
+63  
S C U F R  
G-Yl (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction between  
green and yellow.  
S C U F R  
:
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis  
independent color correction.  
∫ COLOR  
CORRECT  
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
S
U F R  
Yl (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction for yellow.  
:
<Notes>  
+00  
:
O If the master gain is set to –3dB for shooting, coloring  
phenomenon may occur in the high brightness portion of  
the images.  
+63  
S C U F R  
Yl-R (PHASE)  
–63  
For performing the hue correction between  
yellow and red.  
:
To reduce this phenomenon, reduce the KNEE SLOPE  
value on the KNEE/LEVEL screen, then check that the  
coloring phenomenon does not occur and shoot again.  
To activate the KNEE SLOPE value, perform the following  
settings.  
+00  
:
+63  
S C U F R  
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis  
independent color correction of the position  
selected with the GAIN switch (L, M, H).  
∫ COLOR  
CORRECT  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch  
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF  
S C U F R  
MANUAL KNEE item on the KNEE/LEVEL screen  
∫
ON  
O Items with $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU SW ($) R/W menu items on the <CARD R/W  
SELECT> screen.  
Items without $ in front of their names are set by the  
PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W menu item.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
For details, refer to “7-6-2 CARD R/W SELECT.”  
109  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-3-6 MID SETTING  
7-3-7 HIGH SETTING  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
–3dB  
For setting the master gain to –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,  
–3dB  
For setting the master gain to –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,  
∫ MASTER GAIN  
∫ MASTER GAIN  
:
:
12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27 or 30 dB.  
12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27 or 30 dB.  
6dB  
12dB  
:
:
30dB  
30dB  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For performing the horizontal detail  
correction level setting.  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For performing the horizontal detail  
correction level setting.  
:
:
08  
06  
:
:
63  
63  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For performing the vertical detail correction  
level setting.  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
For performing the vertical detail correction  
level setting.  
:
:
18  
16  
:
:
31  
31  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
DTL CORING  
00  
For performing the noise elimination level  
setting for detail.  
DTL CORING  
00  
For performing the noise elimination level  
setting for detail.  
:
:
02  
03  
:
:
15  
15  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
For performing the horizontal detail  
frequency selection.  
Approximate peak frequencies  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
For performing the horizontal detail  
frequency selection.  
Approximate peak frequencies  
:
:
18  
18  
:
:
31  
31  
0: 9 MHz  
20: 12 MHz  
10: 10 MHz  
30: 15 MHz  
0: 9 MHz  
20: 12 MHz  
10: 10 MHz  
30: 15 MHz  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.  
LEVEL DEPEND.  
0
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.  
:
1
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details of  
dark sections are compressed.  
If the numerical value is larger, details of  
bright sections are also compressed.  
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details of  
dark sections are compressed.  
If the numerical value is larger, details of  
bright sections are also compressed.  
3
:
:
5
5
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
MASTER GAMMA  
0.30  
For setting the master gamma.  
(0.01 step)  
MASTER GAMMA  
0.30  
For setting the master gamma.  
(0.01 step)  
:
:
0.45  
0.55  
:
:
0.75  
0.75  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
BLACK GAMMA  
–3  
For setting the gamma curve for the dark  
BLACK GAMMA  
–3  
For setting the gamma curve for the dark  
:
:
portion.  
–3 to –1:  
portion.  
–3 to –1:  
OFF  
OFF  
:
:
+3  
+3  
The dark portion is compressed.  
OFF:  
The dark portion is compressed.  
OFF:  
Standard state  
Standard state  
+1 to +3:  
+1 to +3:  
The dark portion is extended.  
The dark portion is extended.  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
OFF  
A
For selecting the color correction table for  
the linear matrix.  
OFF  
A
For selecting the color correction table for  
the linear matrix.  
∫ MATRIX TABLE  
∫ MATRIX TABLE  
B
B
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis  
independent color correction.  
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis  
independent color correction.  
∫ COLOR  
CORRECT  
∫ COLOR  
CORRECT  
S
U F R  
S
U F R  
<Note>  
Items with $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU SW ($) R/W menu items on the <CARD R/W  
SELECT> screen.  
Items without $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W menu item.  
For details, refer to “7-6-2 CARD R/W SELECT.”  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
110  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-3-8 ADDITIONAL DTL  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
KNEE APE LVL  
OFF  
1
For changing the detail level of the high  
brightness portion.  
2
:
5
S C U F R  
DTL GAIN(+)  
–31  
For changing the + direction level of the  
detail.  
:
+00  
:
+31  
S C U F R  
DTL GAIN(–)  
–31  
For changing the – (below) direction level of  
:
the detail.  
+00  
:
+31  
S C U F R  
DTL CLIP  
00  
For setting the level for clipping the detail  
signals.  
7
:
63  
S C U F R  
DTL SOURCE  
(R+G)/2  
(G+B)/2  
2G+R+B /4  
(3G+R)/4  
R
For setting the proportion of the RGB signal  
components that provide the detail.  
G
S C U F R  
V DTL FREQ  
360TV  
450TV  
540TV  
630TV  
720TV  
For selecting the vertical detail frequency.  
O It is enabled when the recording format is  
set to 720P.  
S C U F R  
H.DTL LINE MIX  
0H  
1H  
2H  
For setting the number of scanning lines to  
be added to the video signals in order to  
generate the horizontal detail signals.  
S C U F R  
MASTER DTL  
–31  
For revising the master detail level.  
:
+00  
:
+31  
S C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
111  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-3-9 SKIN TONE DTL  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
OFF  
A
B
AB  
For selecting the skin color table for enabling  
the skin tone detail.  
The skin color table is provided in the SKIN  
TONE TABLE item.  
By enabling the skin tone detail, it is possible  
to shoot human skin more accurately.  
I CENTER  
000  
For setting the center position on the I axis  
(for setting an area that enables skin tone.)  
∫ SKIN TONE DTL  
:
035  
:
255  
S C U F R  
I WIDTH  
000  
For setting the area width for enabling the  
skin tone on the I-axis of which the center is  
the I CENTER.  
S C U F R  
:
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the zebra pattern in  
the skin tone area displayed in the  
viewfinder screen.  
The zebra pattern is displayed when this  
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN TONE  
DTL> screen is opened.  
The zebra pattern is displayed on area A or  
B, which is selected in the SKIN TONE  
TABLE item.  
It is impossible to display both area A and B  
at the same time.  
∫ SKIN TONE  
ZEBRA VF  
055  
:
255  
S C U F R  
Q WIDTH  
00  
For setting the area width for enabling the  
skin tone on the Q-axis of which the center  
is the I CENTER  
:
10  
:
90  
S C U F R  
Q PHASE  
–180  
For setting phases of the area for enabling  
skin tone as setting the standard to the Q-  
axis.  
:
+000  
S C U F R  
:
+179  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to superimpose the zebra  
pattern in the skin tone area output from the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
∫ SKIN TONE  
ZEBRA VOUT  
S C U F R  
O When the VIDEO OUT switch is set to the  
SD SDI or VBS position, the zebra pattern  
will not be superimposed.  
S C U F R  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to superimpose the zebra  
pattern in the skin tone area output from the  
MON OUT connector.  
∫ SKIN TONE  
ZEBRA MONI  
S C U F R  
SKIN TONE TABLE  
A
B
For selecting the skin tone table for enabling  
the skin tone details.  
S C U F R  
SKIN TONE GET  
For fetching the color information of A or B,  
which is selected in the SKIN TONE TABLE  
item, near the center marker.  
When this function is executed, data from I  
CENTER to  
automatically.  
Q
PHASE are fetched  
The fetched data will be the table data of A  
or B, which is selected in the SKIN TONE  
TABLE item.  
It is impossible to obtain color information of  
both A and B at the same time.  
S
U F R  
Y
R-Y  
SKIN DTL CORING  
0
For setting the effect level of the skin tone  
detail.  
:
Q-WIDTH  
5
I-WIDTH  
:
Y-MAX  
7
S C U F R  
I-CENTER  
+ direction  
Y MAX  
000  
For setting the maximum value of brightness  
for enabling the skin tone.  
:
190  
:
– direction  
Q-PHASE  
255  
B-Y  
Y-MIN  
0
S C U F R  
Y MIN  
000  
For setting the minimum value of brightness  
for enabling the skin tone.  
=SKIN TONE AREA  
:
010  
:
255  
S C U F R  
<Note>  
Items with $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU SW ($) R/W menu items on the <CARD R/W  
SELECT> screen.  
Items without $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W menu item.  
For details, refer to “7-6-2 CARD R/W SELECT.”  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
112  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-3-10 KNEE/LEVEL  
7-3-11 GAMMA  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
MASTER PED  
–200  
For performing the MASTER PEDESTAL  
setting.  
MASTER GAMMA  
0.30  
For setting the master gamma in increments  
of 0.01 steps.  
:
:
+015  
0.45  
:
:
+200  
0.75  
S C U F R  
S
U F R  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the mode which is to be  
established when the AUTO KNEE switch is  
at OFF. The KNEE POINT/SLOPE setting  
value is active when ON is selected.  
R GAMMA  
–15  
For performing the gamma setting for Rch.  
For performing the gamma setting for Bch.  
∫ MANUAL KNEE  
:
+00  
:
+15  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
KNEE POINT  
70.0%  
For setting the knee point position in  
increments of 0.5% steps.  
:
B GAMMA  
–15  
:
93.0%  
:
+00  
:
107.0%  
+15  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
KNEE SLOPE  
00  
For setting the inclination of the knee.  
:
GAMMA MODE  
SEL  
HD  
SD  
For selecting the gamma mode.  
HD:  
85  
7
:
FILM LIKE1  
FILM LIKE2  
FILM LIKE3  
Video gamma characteristics for HD  
(High Definition)  
SD:  
The gain in the dark section is higher than  
the HD gamma.  
FILM LIKE1:  
The cinema gamma characteristics for  
video applications are selected.  
FILM LIKE2:  
The cinema gamma characteristics for  
video applications are selected.  
In this setting gradations in highlit areas  
can be expressed better than when FILM  
LIKE1 is selected.  
99  
S C U F R  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON/OFF of the white clip  
function.  
When it is set to ON, the set value for the  
WHITE CLIP LVL becomes effective.  
∫ WHITE CLIP  
S C U F R  
WHITE CLIP LVL  
90%  
For performing the white clip level setting.  
:
109%  
S C U F R  
A.KNEE POINT  
80%  
For setting the auto knee point position in  
increments of 0.5% steps.  
When the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selection  
switch is set to CAM.AUTO KNEE ON, this  
function is enabled.  
:
93%  
FILM LIKE3:  
:
The cinema gamma characteristics for  
video applications are selected.  
In this setting gradations in highlit areas  
can be expressed better than when FILM  
LIKE2 is selected.  
107%  
S C U F R  
A.KNEE LVL  
100  
For setting the auto knee level.  
:
107  
S C U F R  
:
109  
S C U F R  
A.KNEE  
RESPONSE  
1
For setting the auto knee response rate.  
FILM LIKE1  
:
When  
a
numerical value is larger, the  
4
:
response speed is slower.  
8
S C U F R  
<Note>  
FILM LIKE3  
FILM LIKE2  
SD  
Items with $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU SW ($) R/W menu items on the <CARD R/W  
SELECT> screen.  
Items without $ in front of their names are set by the PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W menu item.  
HD  
For details, refer to “7-6-2 CARD R/W SELECT.”  
Luminance  
O When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is used for FILM  
LIKE3, the following settings are recommended.  
MANUAL KNEE: ON  
KNEE POINT : 85.0%  
KNEE SLOPE : 50  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
113  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
∫
7-3-12 CAMERA SETTING  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
DETAIL  
ON  
For switching ON/OFF of the detail signals.  
OFF  
S C U F R  
HIGH COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the mode  
enlarging the color dynamic range.  
S C U F R  
GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the gamma  
correction.  
S C U F R  
TEST SAW  
ON  
For switching ON/OFF of the test signals.  
OFF  
S C U F R  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the flare  
compensation.  
S C U F R  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For switching ON/OFF of the aperture  
correction.  
S C U F R  
<Note>  
All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the  
item PAINT MENU SW($) R/W in the “7-6-2 CARD R/W  
SELECT” screen.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
114  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-4 VF  
7-4-1 VF DISPLAY  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
DISP CONDITION  
NORMAL  
HOLD  
NORMAL:  
The statuses are displayed at all times.  
HOLD:  
The statuses are displayed only when the  
MODE CHECK switch is pressed.  
C U F R  
DISP MODE  
1
2
3
For setting the display mode.  
This sets what is displayed in the viewfinder  
screen when the state of the unit is changed.  
For details, refer to “4-7-4 Display modes  
and setting changes/ adjustment result  
messages.”  
C U F R  
VF OUT  
Y
NAM  
R
For selecting the video signals to display in  
the viewfinder screen.  
Y:  
Luminance signal  
G
B
NAM: The signal with the highest level  
among the R, G and B signals is  
output.  
7
R:  
G:  
B:  
R channel signal  
G channel signal  
B channel signal  
C U F R  
VF DTL  
0
For setting the detail level of the viewfinder  
screen.  
If it is set to “0”, it has the same detail as the  
main line system signals.  
:
5
If it is set to “5”, it has about double of details  
of the main line system signals.  
C U F R  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
0%  
For setting the ZEBRA1 detection level (IRE  
level).  
Zebra pattern display  
ZEBRA 2  
:
70%  
:
Video level  
109%  
ON  
OFF  
SPOT  
C U F R  
109%  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
0%  
For setting the ZEBRA2 detection level (IRE  
level).  
:
85%  
:
109%  
C U F R  
ZEBRA2  
ON  
SPOT  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for ZEBRA2 or  
selecting SPOT.  
ZEBRA 2  
C U F R  
DETECT  
LOW LIGHT LVL  
OFF  
10%  
15%  
20%  
25%  
30%  
35%  
For setting how much lower the camera’s  
input light quantity should be in order for  
“LOW LIGHT” to be displayed.  
ZEBRA 1  
DETECT  
C U F R  
RC MENU DISP.  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the menu in the  
viewfinder screen when the remote control  
unit is connected to the unit.  
0%  
C U F R  
MARKER/  
CHAR LVL  
50%  
60%  
70%  
80%  
90%  
100%  
For setting the brightness of markers and  
characters in the viewfinder screen.  
C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
115  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-4-2 VF MARKER  
7-4-3 VF USER BOX  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TABLE  
A
B
For selecting the VF MARKER setting table.  
This item is used to set the current values of  
table A or B which have been selected using  
the menu items listed below.  
USER BOX  
ON  
OFF  
For setting whether the user box is displayed  
in the viewfinder or not.  
C U F R  
C U F R  
USER BOX WIDTH  
1
For setting the horizontal width of the user  
box.  
:
CENTER MARK  
OFF  
For selecting the center marker.  
OFF: The center marker is not displayed.  
13  
1
2
3
4
:
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Center blank (large)  
+ (small)  
100  
C U F R  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
For setting the vertical height of the user  
box.  
:
Center blank (small)  
C U F R  
13  
:
SAFETY MARK  
OFF  
For selecting the type of safety marker  
100  
1
2
frame.  
C U F R  
OFF: The safety marker frame is not  
displayed.  
Box  
USER BOX H POS  
–50  
For setting the horizontal position of the user  
box center.  
:
1:  
2:  
+00  
:
+50  
C U F R  
USER BOX V POS  
–50  
For setting the vertical position of the user  
box center.  
:
Corner frames  
+00  
:
+50  
C U F R  
C U F R  
SAFETY AREA  
80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%  
with a fixed ratio between of width and  
height.  
O The user box can be displayed in any position as a box-  
:
type cursor.  
90%  
:
100%  
C U F R  
FRAME MARK  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the frame  
marker.  
C U F R  
FRAME SIG  
4:3  
For setting the frame marker.  
The VISTA setting is 16:8.65.  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
C U F R  
FRAME LVL  
0
For setting the level outside the frame  
marker.  
0: Equivalent to signal OFF (Blanking  
state)  
:
15  
15: Same brightness as center area  
C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
116  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-4-4 VF INDICATOR1  
7-4-5 VF INDICATOR2  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the extender  
display.  
TAPE  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the remaining  
tape amount display.  
C U F R  
C U F R  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the shutter  
speed display.  
BATTERY  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the battery  
voltage display.  
C U F R  
C U F R  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the filter No.  
display.  
AUDIO LVL  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the audio level  
meter display.  
C U F R  
C U F R  
WHITE  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the AWB  
PRE/A/B display.  
TC  
TCG  
TCR  
TCG/TCR  
OFF  
For selecting the time code which is to be  
displayed.  
TCG:  
The time code generator value is  
displayed in the E-E mode.  
TCR:  
For displaying the time code reader value  
during playback  
C U F R  
GAIN  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON/OFF of the gain currently  
selected, S.GAIN, DS. GAIN and LINE MIX  
GAIN displays.  
C U F R  
IRIS  
OFF  
IRIS  
S+IRIS  
S
OFF: Neither the super iris ON status nor  
the aperture value is displayed.  
IRIS: Only the aperture value is displayed.  
S+IRIS:Both the super iris ON status and  
aperture value are displayed.  
7
TCG/TCR:  
In EE mode, the time code generator  
value is displayed from the connectors; in  
playback mode, the time code reader  
value is displayed.  
S:  
The super iris ON status is  
displayed.  
OFF:  
O The display of the aperture value and the  
display of the iris override are interlinked.  
When the iris override is changed, it is  
forcibly displayed for 3 seconds.  
The time code is not displayed at any  
time.  
C U F R  
VTR WARNING  
ALWAYS  
NORMAL  
OFF  
For selecting how VTR warnings are  
displayed.  
ALWAYS: It is displayed every time a warning  
has occurred.  
NORMAL: It is displayed for 3 seconds when  
a warning has occurred and also  
for 3 seconds after recording has  
started and after recording has  
finished.  
C U F R  
CAMERA ID  
BAR  
OFF  
For setting to record the camera ID.  
BAR:The camera ID is recorded when the  
color bar signals are recorded.  
OFF: It is not recorded.  
C U F R  
ID POSITION  
UPPER R  
UPPER L  
LOWER R  
LOWER L  
For setting the position to display the  
camera ID.  
UPPER R: Top right  
UPPER L: Top left  
LOWER R: Bottom right  
LOWER L: Bottom left  
OFF:  
It is not displayed at any time.  
C U F R  
COMPRESSION  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON/OFF of the compression  
mode, which is to be displayed.  
ON: “COMP” will be displayed when the  
COMPRESSION MODE item (the  
VTR FUNCTION screen on the VTR  
MENU page) is set to DARK.  
C U F R  
DATE/TIME  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting an option to display  
year/month/day and hour/minute/second  
simultaneously when the camera ID is  
displayed.  
OFF: It is not displayed at any time.  
C U F R  
C U F R  
SAVE LED  
SAVE&  
TAPE  
SAVE  
For setting the operation of the SAVE lamp.  
SAVE&TAPE:  
ZOOM LVL  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the zoom  
position display.  
The lamp lights up when the VTR  
SAVE/STBY switch has been set to the  
SAVE position. It is off during recording.  
As the tape is approaching the end, it  
starts flashing in tandem with the warning  
alarm.  
C U F R  
COLOR TEMP  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the color  
temperature display.  
C U F R  
SYSTEM MODE  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the system  
mode display.  
C U F R  
SAVE:  
The lamp lights up when the VTR  
SAVE/STBY switch has been set to the  
SAVE position. It is off during recording.  
CAMERA MODE  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the camera  
mode display.  
C U F R  
C U F R  
DRS  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON/OFF of the dynamic range  
stretcher mode display.  
C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
117  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-4-6 MODE CHECK IND  
7-4-7 !LED  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the status screen  
when the MODE CHECK button is pressed.  
GAIN(0dB)  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a  
value other than 0dB.  
lamp on the  
C U F R  
C U F R  
!LED  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to indicate causes for turning  
GAIN(-3dB)  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a  
value other than –3dB or –6dB.  
lamp on the  
on the  
lamp on the viewfinder is  
displayed when the MODE CHECK button is  
pressed.  
C U F R  
The causes for turning on the  
lamp are  
DS.GAIN  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the DS. GAIN  
(cumulative gain) is activated.  
lamp on the  
displayed with ! .  
C U F R  
FUNCTION  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the FUNCTION  
screen when the MODE CHECK button is  
pressed.  
C U F R  
LINE MIX  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the LINE MIX GAIN is  
activated.  
lamp on the  
C U F R  
AUDIO  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the AUDIO screen  
when the MODE CHECK button is pressed.  
C U F R  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
C U F R  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the electronic shutter is  
activated.  
lamp on the  
P.ON IND  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the status screen  
immediately after turning on the power of the  
unit.  
C U F R  
WHITE PRESET  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the WHITE BAL switch  
is set to the PRESET position.  
lamp on the  
<Note>  
Even if it is set to “ON” in this item, the  
status screen is not displayed immediately  
after turning on the power of the unit when  
the STATUS item is set to OFF.  
C U F R  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the lens extender is  
activated.  
lamp on the  
C U F R  
C U F R  
B.GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the BLACK GAMMA is  
activated.  
lamp on the  
C U F R  
MATRIX  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the color correction table  
for the linear matrix is selected.  
lamp on the  
C U F R  
COLOR  
CORRECTION  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the 12-axis independent  
color correction is selected.  
lamp on the  
C U F R  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the filter combination is  
anyone other than 3200K and CLEAR.  
lamp on the  
C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
118  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-5 OPERATION  
7-5-1 CAMERA ID  
7-5-3 SHUTTER SELECT  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
CAMERA ID setting 1  
Item  
Remarks  
ID1:  
ID2:  
ID3:  
**********  
**********  
**********  
POSITION1 SEL  
For 59.94 Hz  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION 1.  
1/100  
C U F  
C U F  
C U F  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
CAMERA ID setting 2  
CAMERA ID setting 3  
<Note>  
For 50 Hz  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
If READ FACTORY DATA is selected, this setting will be  
cleared.  
7-5-2 SHUTTER SPEED  
C U F R  
7
POSITION2 SEL  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION 2.  
For 59.94 Hz  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
SYNCHRO SCAN  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting SYNCHRO SCAN as the  
shutter speed to be used.  
C U F R  
POSITION1  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting POSITION1 as the shutter  
speed to be used.  
For 50 Hz  
1/60  
C U F R  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
POSITION2  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting POSITION2 as the shutter  
speed to be used.  
C U F R  
POSITION3  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting POSITION3 as the shutter  
speed to be used.  
C U F R  
C U F R  
POSITION4  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting POSITION4 as the shutter  
speed to be used.  
POSITION3 SEL  
For 59.94 Hz  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION 3.  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
C U F R  
POSITION5  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting POSITION5 as the shutter  
speed to be used.  
C U F R  
POSITION6  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting POSITION6 as the shutter  
speed to be used.  
C U F R  
For 50 Hz  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
119  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-5-4 USER SW  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
POSITION4 SEL  
For 59.94 Hz  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION 4.  
USER MAIN SW  
INH  
S.GAIN  
For setting the function to be allocated to the  
USER MAIN button.  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
DS.GAIN  
LINE MIX  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.GAMMA  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
DRS  
For details, refer to “4-9-3 Allocating function  
to the USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2  
buttons.  
For 50 Hz  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
C U F R  
C U F R  
USER 1 SW  
INH  
For setting the function to be allocated to the  
USER1 button.  
For details, refer to “4-9-3 Allocating function  
to the USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2  
buttons.  
POSITION5 SEL  
For 59.94 Hz  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION 5.  
S.GAIN  
DS.GAIN  
LINE MIX  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.GAMMA  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
DRS  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
For 50 Hz  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
C U F R  
C U F R  
USER 2 SW  
INH  
For setting the function to be allocated to the  
USER2 button.  
For details, refer to “4-9-3 Allocating function  
to the USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2  
buttons.  
S.GAIN  
DS.GAIN  
LINE MIX  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.GAMMA  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
DRS  
POSITION6 SEL  
For 59.94 Hz  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION 6.  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
For 50 Hz  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
C U F R  
C U F R  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
120  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-5-5 SW MODE  
7-5-6 WHITE BALANCE MODE  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
RET SW  
R.REVIEW  
CAM RET  
For setting the function when the USER  
button on the unit, to which the RET button  
of the lens or the RET SW function is  
allocated, is pressed.  
FILTER INH  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting independently whether  
memory data for white balance (Ach, Bch) is  
retained or not for the respective CC filters.  
ON:  
R.REVIEW:  
REC view function  
It is possible to check a last few seconds  
of the records taken.  
Regardless of the CC filter, data for the  
memories (2 memories) for Ach and Bch  
is retained.  
OFF:  
CAM RET:  
Return video function  
It is possible to confirm the return video  
signals (analog HD-Y signals) supplied to  
the GENKLOCK IN connector on the unit  
by using the viewfinder.  
The memory data (8 memories) for Ach  
and Bch is retained for the respective CC  
filters.  
C U F R  
SHOCKLESS AWB OFF  
FAST  
For setting the length of time for transiting to  
the switched position of white balance, when  
the position of the WHITE BAL switch is  
changed.  
NORMAL  
<Notes>  
SLOW1  
SLOW2  
SLOW3  
O If video signals are input with different  
formats from the HD-SDI output  
signals of the unit, the return video  
images are not displayed properly.  
O When the GENLOCK item (the  
GENLOCK screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page) is set to INT, the  
return video image may be displayed  
as slightly shaking horizontally.  
OFF:  
FAST:  
To transit instantly  
About 1 second  
7
NORMAL:About 2 seconds  
SLOW1: About 3 seconds  
SLOW2: About 10 seconds  
SLOW3: About 20 seconds  
C U F R  
AWB AREA  
25%  
50%  
90%  
For switching the detection area for  
executing the automatic adjustment of white  
balance.  
C U F R  
S.BLK LVL  
OFF  
–10  
–20  
–30  
For setting the super black level.  
25%: An area near the screen center  
equivalent to 25% of the screen is  
detected.  
C U F R  
50%: An area near the screen center  
equivalent to 50% of the screen is  
detected.  
90%: An area equivalent to 90% of the  
screen is detected.  
AUTO KNEE SW  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON/OFF of the AUTO KNEE  
function.  
When it is set to OFF, the AUTO KNEE may  
not function even if the AUTO KNEE switch  
is turned ON.  
C U F R  
S C U F R  
COLOR TEMP PRE  
For setting the color temperature when the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to the PRST  
position.  
O Depending on the position of the CC filter,  
the range of available color temperature  
varies.  
O If the position of the CC filter is switched  
after setting the color temperature, the set  
value for the color temperature changes.  
2300K;  
:
SHD,ABB SW CTL  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to adjust the black shading  
automatically when the AUTO W/B BAL  
switch is held to the ABB side for 8 seconds  
or more.  
3200K  
:
8000K  
C U F R  
COLOR BARS  
For AJ-HDX900P  
For AJ-HDX900E  
For selecting the color bar to be used.  
SMPTE:  
Color bar complied with the SMPTE  
standards  
FULL BARS:  
Full color bar  
SPLIT:  
SPLIT color bar for SNG (Satellite News  
Gathering)  
ARIB:  
Color bar complied with the ARIB  
standards  
SMPTE  
FULL  
BARS  
SPLIT  
ARIB  
F
AWB A TEMP  
For setting the color temperature when the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to the A position.  
If the automatic adjustment of white balance  
is executed in the A position, the color  
temperature at that time is memorized in the  
position of the WHITE BAL switch A.  
O If the position of the CC filter is switched  
after setting the color temperature, the set  
value for the color temperature changes.  
2300K;  
:
3200K  
:
8000K  
C U F R  
F
S.GAIN OFF  
L/M/H  
S.GAIN  
For selecting the method used to release the  
super gain mode.  
L/M/H: The mode is released by making a  
change in the L/M/H switch  
position and the S.GAIN switch  
(USER switch).  
AWB B TEMP  
For setting the color temperature when the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to the B position.  
If the automatic adjustment of white balance  
is executed in the B position, the color  
temperature at that time is memorized in the  
position of the WHITE BAL switch B.  
O If the position of the CC filter is switched  
after setting the color temperature, the set  
value for the color temperature changes.  
2300K;  
:
3200K  
:
8000K  
S.GAIN: The mode is released using only  
the S.GAIN switch (USER switch).  
C U F  
DS.GAIN OFF  
L/M/H  
DS.GAIN  
For selecting the method used to release the  
digital super gain mode (cumulative gain).  
F
L/M/H:  
The mode is released by making a  
change in the L/M/H switch  
position and the DS.GAIN switch  
(USER switch).  
DS.GAIN: The mode is released using only  
the DS.GAIN switch (USER  
switch).  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
121  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-5-7 USER SW GAIN  
7-5-8 LENS/IRIS  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
S.GAIN  
30 dB  
For selecting whether or not to enable a  
setting of 30 dB for SUPER GAIN.  
2 : The 30 dB setting is enabled.  
O : The 30 dB setting is disabled.  
A.IRIS LEVEL  
000  
For setting the AUTO IRIS target value.  
2
O
:
045  
:
100  
C U F R  
C U F R  
36 dB  
For selecting whether or not to enable a  
setting of 36 dB for SUPER GAIN.  
2 : The 36 dB setting is enabled.  
O : The 36 dB setting is disabled.  
A.IRIS PEAK/AVE  
000  
For determining the ratio of the peak to the  
AUTO IRIS reference.  
2
O
:
030  
:
The higher the ratio, the greater the  
response to the peak inside the iris detection  
window; the lower the ratio, the greater the  
response to the average value inside the iris  
detection window.  
100  
C U F R  
DS.GAIN  
6 dB:  
For selecting whether or not to enable a  
setting increase of 6 dB for DS.GAIN.  
(The pictures become 15 frames/second.)  
2 : The 6 dB setting increase is enabled.  
O : The 6 dB setting increase is disabled.  
2
O
C U F R  
A.IRIS WINDOW  
NORM1  
NORM2  
CENTR  
For selecting the auto iris detection window.  
NORM1: Window from the screen center  
NORM2: Window from the bottom of the  
screen  
CENTR: Window in the shape of a spot at  
the screen center  
C U F R  
For selecting whether or not to enable a  
setting increase of 10 dB for DS.GAIN.  
(The pictures become 10 frames/second.)  
2 : The 10 dB setting increase is enabled.  
O : The 10 dB setting increase is disabled.  
10 dB:  
2
O
C U F R  
S.IRIS LEVEL  
000  
For setting the target value of the SUPER  
IRIS (backlight compensation function).  
:
C U F R  
080  
:
For selecting whether or not to enable a  
setting increase of 12 dB for DS.GAIN.  
(The pictures become 7.5 frames/second.)  
2 : The 12 dB setting increase is enabled.  
O : The 12 dB setting increase is disabled.  
12 dB:  
2
O
100  
C U F R  
IRIS GAIN  
CAM  
LENS  
For selecting whether the IRIS GAIN  
adjustment is executed by the camera or the  
lens.  
C U F R  
For selecting whether or not to enable a  
setting increase of 15 dB for DS.GAIN.  
(The pictures become 5 frames/second.)  
2 : The 15 dB setting increase is enabled.  
O : The 15 dB setting increase is disabled.  
15 dB:  
2
O
<Note>  
For a lens with an extender (k2, k0.8 etc.)  
that was manufactured before the DIGI  
POWER type lens from Fujinon, the IRIS  
control on the unit will not operate properly  
when set to the CAM, since IRIS correction  
control is operated on the lens if the  
extender is inserted.  
C U F R  
For selecting whether or not to enable a  
setting increase of 20 dB for DS.GAIN.  
(The pictures become 3 frames/second.)  
2 : The 20 dB setting increase is enabled.  
O : The 20 dB setting increase is disabled.  
20 dB:  
2
O
C U F R  
IRIS GAIN VALUE  
01  
For setting the IRIS GAIN adjustment value.  
The setting takes effect when IRIS GAIN has  
been set to CAM.  
C U F R  
:
10  
:
O When the DS.GAIN function is active, the shutter mode is  
20  
C U F R  
set to OFF.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
122  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-6 FILE  
7-6-1 CARD READ/WRITE  
7-6-3 LENS FILE  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
R.SELECT  
1
For selecting the number of the file whose  
data is to be read.  
FILE SELECT  
1
For selecting the number of the lens file.  
:
:
8
8
F
F
F
READ  
For reading the data from the SD memory  
card.  
READ  
For reading the data from the lens file.  
For writing the data in the lens file.  
For resetting the data of the lens file.  
W.SELECT  
1
For selecting the number of the file in which  
the data is to be written.  
WRITE  
:
8
RESET ALL  
WRITE  
For writing the data of the camera into the  
SD memory card.  
TITLE1-8  
************  
For setting a title consisting of not more than  
12 characters.  
CARD CONFIG  
TITLE READ  
TITLE1 - 8:  
For formatting the SD memory card.  
For reading the title assigned to the data  
from the SD memory card.  
7
For setting a title consisting of not more than  
8 characters.  
7-6-4 LENS FILE CARD R/W  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
CARD FILE  
SELECT  
1
For selecting the number of the lens file.  
7-6-2 CARD R/W SELECT  
:
8
F
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
READ  
WRITE  
For reading the lens file data from the SD  
memory card.  
SYSTEM MODE  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
SYSTEM MODE item and the CAMERA  
MODE item for CARD READ/WRITE.  
For writing the lens file data into the SD  
memory card.  
F
ID READ/WRITE  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
CAMERA ID during CARD READ/WRITE  
data operations.  
TITLE READ  
TITLE1 - 8:  
For reading the title of the lens file.  
F
************  
For setting a title consisting of not more than  
12 characters.  
USER MENU  
SELECT R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
USER MENU SELECT settings during  
CARD READ/ WRITE data operations.  
F
SYSTEM MENU  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether the items for SYSTEM  
SETTING (other than the SYSTEM MODE  
item and the CAMERA MODE item) and the  
OPTION MENU are handled or not for  
CARD READ/WRITE.  
7-6-5 SCENE  
F
Variable  
range  
PAINT MENU  
LEVEL R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
PAINT MENU adjustment values during  
CARD READ/WRITE data operations.  
Item  
Remarks  
READ USER DATA  
For reading the data from the memory’s user  
F
area.  
PAINT MENU  
SW(∫) R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
PAINT MENU settings during CARD READ/  
WRITE data operations.  
F
SCENE SEL  
1
For selecting the scene file.  
:
VF MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
4
F
VF  
MENU  
settings  
during  
CARD  
READ/WRITE data operations.  
READ  
For reading the data from the scene file.  
For writing the data in the scene file.  
F
OPERATION MENU ON  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
OPERATION MENU settings during CARD  
READ/WRITE data operations.  
R/W  
OFF  
WRITE  
RESET  
F
MAINTE MENU  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
MAINTENANCE MENU settings during  
CARD READ/WRITE data operations.  
For returning the SCENE FILE values to the  
initial values.  
F
TITLE 1-4  
**********  
For creating a title for a scene file.  
VTR MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to handle the  
VTR MENU settings during CARD READ/  
WRITE data operations.  
F
For details, refer to “4-10 Set data handling.”  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
123  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-7 MAINTENANCE  
7-6-6 INITIALIZE  
7-7-1 SYSTEM CHECK  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
For returning the state of the unit to factory  
settings.  
COLOR CHECK  
ON  
OFF  
For checking whether the camera unit  
operates properly.  
Data returned to factory settings  
O User data  
O Scene file  
Data not returned to factory settings  
O Lens file  
ON:  
The signal level of RGB near the center of  
the screen is displayed in the viewfinder.  
It indicates with numeric values that the  
respective RGB signals are properly  
transmitted from the optical system to the  
digital system and processed.  
OFF:  
O Black shading  
O White shading  
WRITE USER  
DATA  
The menu data that is inherent to the user  
are saved in user data memory on the unit.  
Not display  
For details, refer to “4-10 Set data handling.”  
7-7-2 DIAGNOSTIC  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
CAMSOFT(IN)  
For displaying the version of the software  
used for the flash memory incorporated in  
the microcomputer.  
CAMSOFT(OUT)  
For displaying the version of the software  
used for the externally connected flash  
memory.  
CAM TABLE  
FONT ROM  
FPGA (CHAR)  
FPGA (FM)  
FPGA (D/C)  
FPGA (TG)  
For displaying the version of the tables.  
For displaying the version of the font used  
for the characters.  
For displaying the version of the FPGA for  
characters.  
For displaying the version of the FPGA for  
frame memories.  
For displaying the version of the FPGA for  
down converters.  
For displaying the version of the FPGA for  
the CCD drive.  
7-7-3 LENS ADJ  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
F2.8 ADJ  
F16 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
The iris is set to f/2.8 only when ON is set for  
this item.  
ON  
OFF  
The iris is set to f/16 only when ON is set for  
this item.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
124  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-7-4 BLACK SHADING  
7-7-6 LENS FILE ADJ  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the digital black  
shading compensation.  
RB GAIN CTRL  
RESET  
ON  
OFF  
ON:  
The gains of Rch and Bch adjusted in 7-  
3-1 <RB GAIN CONTROL> screen are  
reset.  
Furthermore, the flare levels of Rch, Gch  
and Bch that are adjusted on 7-3-2 <RGB  
BLACK CONTROL> screen are reset.  
C U F R  
DETECTION  
(DIG)  
–
For executing the digital black shading  
compensation.  
OFF:  
The gains of Rch and Bch adjusted in 7-  
3-1 <RB GAIN CONTROL> screen are  
enabled.  
Furthermore, the flare levels of Rch, Gch  
and Bch that are adjusted on 7-3-2 <RGB  
BLACK CONTROL> screen are enabled.  
7-7-5 WHITE SHADING  
LENS R GAIN  
OFFSET  
–200  
For compensating Rch sensitivity of the lens  
used.  
:
+000  
7
:
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
+200  
F
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the white  
shading compensation.  
LENS B GAIN  
OFFSET  
–200  
For compensating Bch sensitivity of the lens  
used.  
:
C U F R  
+000  
:
R H SAW  
R H PARA  
R V SAW  
R V PARA  
G H SAW  
G H PARA  
G V SAW  
G V PARA  
B H SAW  
B H PARA  
B V SAW  
B V PARA  
–255  
For  
executing  
the  
white  
shading  
:
+200  
compensation manually.  
F
+000  
:
The sawteeth-shaped waveform and the  
parabola waveform of the respective RGB  
channels are adjusted in the horizontal  
direction and the vertical direction.  
LENS R FLARE  
000  
For adjusting the flare level of Rch.  
For adjusting the flare level of Gch.  
For adjusting the flare level of Bch.  
+255  
:
100  
F
LENS G FLARE  
000  
:
100  
F
LENS B FLARE  
000  
:
100  
F
O Data adjusted on the LENS FILE ADJ screen can be  
stored on an SD memory card as a lens file.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
125  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-8 VTR MENU  
7-8-1 VTR FUNCTION  
7-8-2 BATTERY/TAPE  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
HUMID OPE  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to continue  
operation when HUMID alarm state has  
occurred.  
ON: Operation continues until tape slack is  
detected even when the HUMID alarm  
state has occurred during operation.  
OFF: Operation is stopped as soon as the  
HUMID alarm state occurs.  
If the HUMID alarm state occurs during  
recording, the recording operation will  
continue unless tape slack is detected  
regardless of whether ON or OFF has been  
selected as this item’s setting.  
BATTERY SELECT PROPAC14  
TRIMPAC14  
HYTRON50  
HYTRON120  
DIONIC90  
For selecting the type of battery to be used.  
The remaining charge is detected in  
accordance with the battery which has been  
selected.  
The variable range is changed by the item  
settings selected on the “7-8-3 BATTERY  
DIONIC160  
NP-L7  
ENDURA7  
ENDURA10  
ENDURA-D  
PAG L95  
BP-L65/95  
NiCd14  
TYPE A  
SETTING1”  
SETTING2” menus.  
The initial value for TYPE  
and  
“7-8-4  
BATTERY  
A
is set to  
DIONIC100 while the same for TYPE B is  
set to HYTRON100.  
O BP-L65/95 indicates the BP-GL65/95  
battery.  
C U F  
TYPE B  
C U F  
REC START  
ALL  
NORMAL  
For selecting how recording start is to be  
accepted.  
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
AC_ADPT  
PROPAC14  
TRIMPAC14  
HYTRON50  
HYTRON120  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
NP-L7  
For selecting the external power supply to  
connect to the DC IN socket.  
The variable range is changed by the item  
settings selected on the “7-8-3 BATTERY  
C U F  
PAUSE TIMER  
10min  
20min  
30min  
60min  
For selecting the time during which REC/  
PAUSE is to continue.  
SETTING1”  
and  
“7-8-4  
BATTERY  
SETTING2” menus.  
Analog voltage is displayed on the  
viewfinder screen.  
O BP-L65/95 indicates the BP-GL65/95  
battery.  
C U F  
ENDURA7  
ENDURA10  
ENDURA-D  
PAG L95  
BP-L65/95  
NiCd14  
RC CHECK SW  
R.REVIEW  
RETAKE  
For setting the operations of the unit by  
using the REC check button on the remote  
control unit.  
R.REVIEW: The rec-review operation is  
performed.  
TYPE A  
TYPE B  
RETAKE: The retake operation is  
performed, after which playback  
is initiated automatically.  
C U F  
BATT NEAR END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
For setting whether or not to output the  
warning tone when the battery charge is  
nearly depleted.  
C U F  
COMPRESSION  
MODE  
NORMAL  
DARK  
For selecting the DVCPRO compression  
mode.  
C U F  
O This is enabled when the recording format  
is set to 720P.  
NORMAL:  
Normal shooting shall be executed in this  
mode.  
DARK:  
Distortion of compressed video images  
that may occur at dark parts on the video  
images can be suppressed in this mode.  
Distortion of compressed video images on  
other parts may increase.  
BATT NEAR END  
CANCEL  
ON  
OFF  
When this item is set to ON, the warning  
tone and the warning display which are  
being output can be canceled by pressing  
the MODE CHECK button when the battery  
charge is nearly depleted.  
C U F  
BATT END ALARM ON  
OFF  
For setting whether or not to output the  
warning tone when the battery charge is  
depleted.  
C U F  
BATT REMAIN  
FULL  
100%  
70%  
For setting when the remaining charge  
display bar on the LCD is to be displayed  
when a digital battery is used.  
70%: A full charge is indicated with a 70%  
display  
C U F  
100%: A full charge is indicated with a 100%  
display.  
C U F  
TAPE NEAR END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
For setting whether or not to output the  
warning tone when the tape is nearly at its  
end.  
C U F  
TAPE NEAR END  
TIME  
3min  
2min  
For setting the remaining tape time at which  
to sound the warning that the tape has only  
the designated amount of time (2min. or  
3min.) remaining.  
C U F  
TAPE END ALARM ON  
OFF  
For setting whether or not to output the  
warning tone when the tape reaches the  
end.  
C U F  
TAPE REMAIN/∫  
5min/∫  
3min/∫  
For setting the time of each segment (∫)  
that makes up the remaining time display  
bar on the LCD.  
5min: Each segment denotes a remaining  
time of 5 minutes.  
3min: Each segment denotes a remaining  
time of 3 minutes.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
126  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-8-3 BATTERY SETTING1  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
PROPAC14  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
DIONIC90  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
2
O
O : The selection is disabled.  
O : The selection is disabled.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
:
:
13.8  
13.6  
:
:
15.0  
15.0  
C U F  
C U F  
TRIMPAC14  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
DIONIC160  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
2
O
7
O : The selection is disabled.  
O : The selection is disabled.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
:
:
13.6  
13.1  
:
:
15.0  
15.0  
C U F  
C U F  
HYTRON50  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
NP-L7  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
2
O
O : The selection is disabled.  
O : The selection is disabled.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
:
:
13.2  
12.9  
:
:
15.0  
15.0  
C U F  
C U F  
HYTRON120  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
ENDURA7  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
2
O
O : The selection is disabled.  
O : The selection is disabled.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
:
:
13.0  
13.2  
:
:
15.0  
15.0  
C U F  
C U F  
O When the digital battery is attached in the unit, the  
remaining capacity of the battery is displayed in percent.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
127  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-8-4 BATTERY SETTING2  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
ENDURA10  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
NiCd14  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
2
O
O : The selection is disabled.  
O : The selection is disabled.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
NEAR END  
11.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which the battery charge is to considered  
nearly depleted.  
:
13.8  
:
15.0  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
END  
11.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which the battery charge is to be considered  
depleted.  
:
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
:
13.2  
13.2  
:
:
15.0  
15.0  
C U F  
C U F  
TYPE A  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
ENDURA-D  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
O : The selection is disabled.  
O : The selection is disabled.  
FULL  
12.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which FULL is to be displayed.  
:
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
14.6  
:
17.0  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
NEAR END  
11.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which the battery charge is to be considered  
nearly depleted.  
:
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
:
13.6  
:
13.2  
:
15.0  
15.0  
C U F  
END  
11.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which the battery charge is to be considered  
depleted.  
:
PAG L95  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
12.9  
:
15.0  
C U F  
O : The selection is disabled.  
TYPE B  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
2
O
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
O : The selection is disabled.  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
FULL  
12.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which FULL is to be displayed.  
:
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
15.2  
:
:
13.5  
17.0  
:
15.0  
NEAR END  
11.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which the battery charge is to be considered  
nearly depleted.  
C U F  
:
BP-GL65/95  
For enabling or disabling the selection made  
for the BATTERY SELECT item.  
2 : The selection is enabled.  
13.0  
2
:
O
15.0  
O : The selection is disabled.  
END  
11.0  
For selecting in 0.1 V steps the voltage at  
which the battery charge is to be considered  
depleted.  
:
AUTO  
MANUAL  
For selecting how the voltage at which the  
battery charge is considered nearly depleted  
is to be set.  
12.4  
:
15.0  
C U F  
AUTO:  
The voltage is set automatically.  
MANUAL: The voltage is set manually.  
O When the digital battery is attached in the unit, the  
11.0  
For selecting the voltage at which the battery  
charge is to be considered nearly depleted in  
0.1 V steps when MANUAL has been selected  
as the setting for the menu item above.  
remaining capacity of the battery is displayed in percent.  
:
13.6  
:
15.0  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
128  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-8-5 MIC/AUDIO1  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
FRONT VR CH1  
OFF  
FRONT  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
For setting whether or not to make the audio  
control operational for the input system  
selected for CH1.  
TEST TONE  
OFF  
For selecting the test signal.  
NORMAL  
ALWAYS  
CHSEL  
OFF:  
The test tone signal is not output.  
NORMAL: The test tone signal is output to all  
the channels when the CAM/BAR  
switch has been set to BAR and  
the CH1 AUDIO IN switch has  
been set to FRONT.  
ALWAYS: The test tone signal is always  
output to all the channels when the  
CAM/ BAR switch has been set to  
BAR.  
CHSEL: The test tone signal is output to the  
channels for which the CH1 or CH2  
AUDIO IN switch has been set to  
FRONT when the CAM/BAR switch  
is set to BAR. It is not output to  
CH3 or CH4.  
C U F  
FRONT VR CH2  
OFF  
FRONT  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
For setting whether or not to make the audio  
control operational for the input system  
selected for CH2.  
C U F  
MIC LOWCUT CH1 OFF  
FRONT  
For selecting the microphone low-cut filter  
for CH1.  
W.L.  
REAR  
C U F  
7
C U F  
MIC LOWCUT CH2 OFF  
FRONT  
For selecting the microphone low-cut filter  
for CH2.  
W.L.  
REAR  
C U F  
MIC LOWCUT CH3 OFF  
FRONT  
For selecting the microphone low-cut filter  
for CH3.  
7-8-6 MIC/AUDIO2  
W.L.  
REAR  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
C U F  
MIC LOWCUT CH4 OFF  
FRONT  
For selecting the microphone low-cut filter  
for CH4.  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting the phantom power supply for  
the front microphone.  
W.L.  
C U F  
REAR  
C U F  
REAR MIC POWER ON  
OFF  
For selecting the phantom power supply for  
the rear microphone.  
LIMITER CH1  
OFF  
ON  
For selecting the limiter for CH1.  
For selecting the limiter for CH2.  
C U F  
C U F  
LIMITER CH2  
OFF  
ON  
MONITOR SELECT STEREO  
MIX  
For selecting the format of the signals to be  
output to the monitor.  
C U F  
AUTO LEVEL CH3  
OFF  
ON  
For selecting the automatic adjustment of  
the recording level.  
C U F  
FRONT MIC LEVEL –40dB  
For selecting the input level of the front  
microphone.  
–50dB  
C U F  
AUTO LEVEL CH4  
OFF  
ON  
For selecting the automatic adjustment of  
the recording level.  
C U F  
REAR MIC CH1  
LVL  
–50dB  
–60dB  
For selecting the input level of the rear  
microphone.  
C U F  
CUE REC SELECT CH1  
For selecting the signals to be recorded on  
the CUE track.  
C U F  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH1+2  
CH3+4  
REAR MIC CH2  
LVL  
–50dB  
–60dB  
For selecting the input level of the rear  
microphone.  
C U F  
REAR LINE IN LVL  
For AJ-HDX900E  
For AJ-HDX900P  
–3dB  
0dB  
+4dB  
For selecting the rear line input level.  
For selecting the rear audio output level.  
For setting the headroom (reference level).  
C U F  
<Note>  
C U F  
The frequency characteristics when the microphone low-cut  
filter is applied are 200 Hz to 10 kHz.  
AUDIO OUT LVL  
For AJ-HDX900E  
For AJ-HDX900P  
–3dB  
0dB  
+4dB  
C U F  
HEADROOM  
For AJ-HDX900E  
For AJ-HDX900P  
18dB  
20dB  
C U F  
WIRELESS WARN  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to output  
warnings when the reception of the wireless  
receiver is poor.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
129  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-8-7 TC/UB  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
TC MODE  
DF  
NDF  
For selecting the mode advancing the time  
code.  
TCG SET HOLD  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting ON or OFF for the function that  
without fail uses what was previously set as  
the TCG value for recording when the TCG  
value had been set before the power was  
turned off and recording was then performed  
after the power was turned back on again.  
DF:  
Drop frame  
NDF: Non-drop frame  
<Note>  
When the system frequency is set to 50 Hz,  
the mode is the non-drop frame mode.  
C U F  
C U F  
FIRST REC TC  
REGEN  
PRESET  
For selecting whether or not to regenerate  
the time code as the value on the tape  
during the first recording after the power was  
turned on, the cassette was inserted or a  
playback or search operation was  
performed.  
UB MODE  
USER  
TIME  
DATE  
EXT  
TCG  
For selecting the users bits to record in the  
LTC area.  
USER:  
For recording the user setting values.  
(fixed values)  
TIME:  
For recording the local time.  
(hour, minute, second)  
DATE:  
For recording the local date and time.  
(2 digits for year, month, day, time)  
EXT:  
For recording the users bits of the time  
code input in the TC IN connector.  
If the users bits cannot be read, the user  
setting values are recorded.  
TCG:  
C U F  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
P.OFF LCD  
DISPLAY  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to set the LCD’s  
time code and display its count while the  
power is off.  
ON: The time code can be set and  
displayed even while the power is off.  
OFF: While the power is off, the power to  
the LCD section is turned off, and the  
time code can be neither set nor  
displayed.  
C U F  
TC OUT  
TCG  
TCG/TCR  
For selecting the time code to be output to  
the TC OUT connector.  
TCG:  
For recording the value of the time code  
generator.  
The time code generator value is always  
output.  
FRM RATE:  
TCG/TCR:  
For recording the shooting information  
(frame rate etc.) of the camera.  
REGEN:  
In the EE mode, the time code generator  
value is output from the connectors; in the  
playback mode, it is the time code reader  
value which is output.  
For reading the value recorded on the  
tape  
continuously.  
<Note>  
and  
recording  
the  
value  
C U F  
TC DISP SEL  
30F  
24F  
For selecting the display format to be used  
for the frame digits of the time code.  
30F: A number up to 30 frames is indicated  
in frame digits of the time code.  
24F: A number up to 24 frames is indicated  
in frame digits of the time code.  
<Note>  
When the recording format is set to 720P, it  
follows the settings of FRAME RATE UB in  
7-9-1 <OPTION> screen.  
C U F  
VITC UB MODE  
USER/EXT  
TIME  
For selecting the users bits to record in the  
VITC area.  
DATE  
TCG  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
USER/EXT:  
When the system frequency is set to 50 Hz,  
25 frames are displayed.  
When the UB MODE item is set to EXT,  
the users bits of the time core input in the  
TC IN connector is recorded.  
If it is set to any option other than EXT,  
the user setting value is recorded.  
TIME:  
For recording the local time. (hour,  
minute, second)  
DATE:  
For recording the local date and time. (2  
digits for year, month, day, time)  
TCG:  
For recording the value of the time code  
generator.  
C U F  
TC VIDEO  
SYNCRO  
0
1
2
3
For setting to correct the time code  
according to the delay of video signals.  
0: Do not correct.  
1: To delay the time code to be input  
according to the timing of the video  
images.  
2: To forward the time code to be output  
according to the timing of the video  
images.  
3: To delay the time code to be input and  
forward the time code to be output,  
respectively, according to the timing of  
the video images.  
FRM RATE:  
For details, refer to “4-5-4 Externally locking  
the time code”.  
For recording the shooting information  
(frame rate etc.) of the camera.  
REGEN:  
C U F  
REC REVIEW  
REGEN  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether the time code is  
regenerated to the value on the tape or not,  
when subsequent recording starts after  
setting the RET SW item on the SW MODE  
screen to R.REVIEW and pressing the RET  
button on the lens or the USER button on  
the unit on which the RET SW function is  
assigned.  
For reading the value recorded on the  
tape  
continuously.  
<Note>  
and  
recording  
the  
value  
When the video system is set to 24P or  
24PA, or when the recording format is set to  
720P, it follows the settings of FRAME  
RATE UB in 7-9-1 <OPTION> screen.  
ON: The time code is regenerated to the  
value on the tape.  
C U F  
OFF: The time code is not regenerated.  
C U F  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
130  
Chapter 7 Menu description tables (continued)  
7-9 OPTION MENU  
7-8-8 UMID SET/INFO  
7-9-1 OPTION  
Variable  
range  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
Item  
Remarks  
COUNTRY  
NO-INFO  
NO-INFO  
For inputting the name of the user’s country.  
“NO-INFO” is displayed until this is input.  
ENG SECURITY  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether or not to place a  
restriction on the opening and closing of the  
MENU screen.  
ON: The MENU screen can no longer be  
opened. To release this restriction,  
consult your dealer.  
C U F  
ORGANIZATION  
For inputting the name of the user’s  
organization or company. “NO-INFO” is  
displayed until this is input.  
C U F  
OFF:No restriction is placed on the opening  
and closing of the MENU screen.  
USER  
NO-INFO  
For inputting the user’s name. “NO-INFO” is  
displayed until this is input.  
C U F  
TOTAL CHROMA  
GAIN  
–40%  
For setting the chroma level of the PR  
signals and the PB signals.  
:
DEVICE NODE  
For displaying the ID number of the product.  
+00%  
:
+40%  
C
CHROMA OUTPUT ON  
When this is set to OFF, the color elements  
of the video signals are eliminated.  
OFF  
C
7-8-9 VTR DIAG  
7
FRAME RATE UB  
FRAME RATE  
MENU  
For setting the users bits to record when the  
video system is set to 24P or 24PA, or when  
the recording format is set to 720P.  
FRAME RATE:  
Variable  
Item  
Remarks  
range  
For recording the shooting information  
(frame rate etc.) of the camera  
MENU:  
OPERATION  
For displaying the total time during which the  
power has been on.  
This follows the settings in the UB MODE  
item and the VITC UB MODE item of 7-8-  
7 <TC/UB> screen.  
DRUM RUNNING  
For displaying the total time during which the  
drum has rotated.  
C
THREADING  
For displaying the total number of times  
cassettes have been loaded.  
1394 CONFIG  
DFLT(000)  
This is the menu for expanding the  
DCVPRO connector.  
001  
:
Use with DFLT in normal operation.  
DRUM RUNNING r  
For displaying the total time during which the  
drum has rotated after resetting.  
255  
C
1394 GAP COUNT  
0
For setting the interval between packets.  
:
THREADING r  
VTR SYSCON  
SERVO  
For displaying the total number of times  
cassettes have been loaded after resetting.  
40  
:
63  
For displaying the software version of the  
VTR SYSCON microcomputer.  
C
For displaying the software version of the  
SERVO microcomputer.  
FRONT  
For displaying the software version of the  
LCD microcomputer.  
VIDEO FPGA  
PWR PLD  
For displaying the version of the FPGA for  
video signal processing.  
For displaying the version of the PLD for  
controlling the SD memory card.  
The underlining in the variable range column indicates the setting in the preset  
mode.  
131  
Chapter 8 Specifications  
DS GAIN function:  
[GENERAL]  
+6 dB, +10 dB, +12 dB, +15 dB, or +20 dB gain increase  
selectable  
LINE MIX GAIN function  
Power supply:  
DC 12 V (DC 11.0 V - 17.0 V)  
+6 dB (can be set to ON or OFF)  
Power consumption: 36 W  
SUPER GAIN function:  
30 dB or 36 dB selectable  
indicates safety information.  
Shutter speeds:  
1/60 (50 Hz), 1/100 (59.94 Hz), 1/120, 1/250, 1/500,  
1/1000, 1/2000 and HALF  
Synchro scan shutter:  
Ambient operating temperature:  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature:  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to 140°F)  
Ambient operating humidity:  
Within 10% to 85% (relative humidity)  
Continuous operation time:  
Approx. 120 min. (using the DIONIC90 made by  
Anton/Bauer)  
1/60.3 to 1/249.8 (1080-59.94i/720-59.94P)  
1/30.2 to 1/249.8 (1080-29.97P/720-29.97P)  
1/24.1 to 1/249.8  
(1080-23.98P/1080-23.98PA/720-23.98P)  
1/50.2 to 1/209.5 (1080-50i/720-50P)  
1/25.2 to 1/209.5 (1080-25P/720-25P)  
Sensitivity:  
F10 (2000 lx, 89.9% reflection)  
Minimum subject brightness:  
0.032 lx, F1.4, 36 dB (S. GAIN) +20 dB (DS. GAIN)  
+6 dB (LINE MIX)  
Dimensions (WaHaD):  
129 mma271 mma329 mm  
(5-1/8 inchesa10-11/16 inchesa13 inches)  
Weight:  
Approx. 4.5 kg (9.9 lb)  
(main unit only)  
Video signal-to-noise ratio:  
54 dB (typical)  
Registration error:  
[CAMERA UNIT]  
Image sensor:  
Less than 0.03% (entire area, excluding lens distortion)  
2/3-inch CCD a3  
[VTR UNIT]  
Shooting method:  
RGB 3-CCD method  
Total number of pixels:  
1370 (H) k 744 (V)  
Effective number of pixels:  
1280 (H) k 720 (V)  
Horizontal drive frequency:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (50 Hz)  
Lens mount:  
Tape Transport System  
Tape to be used:  
M cassette tape for 1/4-inch DVCPRO  
Tape speed:  
67.640 mm/s (59.94 Hz)  
67.708 mm/s (50 Hz)  
Recording time:  
33 minutes (when AJ-HP33EMG is used)  
Fast forwarding time:  
Approx. 1 min. 30 sec. (when AJ-HP33EMG is used)  
Rewinding time:  
2/3-inch Bayonet type  
Optical system:  
F1.4 prism system  
CC/ND Filter:  
Approx. 1 min. 30 sec. (when AJ-HP33EMG is used)  
CC A: CROSS  
Video System  
B: 3200 K  
Sampling frequency:  
C: 4300 K  
Y:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
D: 6300 K  
74.25 MHz (50 Hz)  
ND 1: CLEAR  
PB/PR: 37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
37.125 MHz (50 Hz)  
2: 1/4ND  
3: 1/16ND  
Quantizing:  
4: 1/64ND  
8 bits  
Quantizing:  
Video compression system:  
DCT + variable-length code  
Video compression ratio:  
1/6.7 (other than 1080-50i/1080-25P)  
1/6.3 (in case of 1080-50i/1080-25P)  
Error correction:  
Reed-Solomon product code  
Video recording bit rate:  
100 Mbps  
14 bits  
Sampling frequency:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (50 Hz)  
Digital signal processing:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
74.25 MHz (50 Hz)  
Programmable gain values:  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB,  
21 dB, 24 dB, 27 dB and 30 dB  
132  
Chapter 8 Specifications (continued)  
Audio System  
Time Code Input Connector  
TC IN (BNC):  
Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz (synchronized with video)  
Quantizing:  
0.5 VP-P to 7 VP-P, high impedance  
16 bits  
Time Code Output Connector  
TC OUT (BNC):  
Frequency response:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz 1.0 dB (at 1 kHz, reference level)  
Dynamic range:  
2.0 VP-P, low impedance  
Better than 85 dB (at 1 kHz, AWTD)  
Distortion:  
Less than 0.1% (at 1 kHz, reference level)  
Wow and flutter:  
Below measurable limits  
Head room:  
Other Connectors  
LENS (12 pins)  
REMOTE (10 pins, connector used for AJ-RC10G)  
DC IN (XLR, 4 pins, male):  
DC 11 V to 17 V  
DC OUT (4 pins):  
DC 11 V to 17 V, the maximum output current 1.5 A  
EVF (20 pins)  
For AJ-HDX900P: 20 dB  
For AJ-HDX900E: 18 dB  
This supports the viewfinder that can be switched  
between 59.94 Hz and 50 Hz.  
DVCPRO output connector (6 pins)  
GPS (6 pins, connector used for AJ-GPS900G)  
[CONNECTOR SECTION]  
Audio Input Connectors  
MIC IN (XLR, 5 pins, female):  
For stereo  
Phantom power supply:  
+48 V (It is possible to turn ON/OFF from the menu.)  
Input level:  
[ACCESSORIES]  
Shoulder strap  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control knob  
Control knob mounting screw a1  
8
–40 dBu (–50 dBu or –40 dBu, selected on menu)  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (XLR a2, 3 pins, female):  
LINE/MIC/MIC + 48 V switching type  
LINE:  
For AJ-HDX900P: +4 dBu  
For AJ-HDX900E: 0 dBu  
(–3 dBu, 0 dBu or +4 dBu, selected on menu)  
MIC: –60 dBu (–60 dBu or –50 dBu, selected on menu)  
MIC + 48 V:  
–60 dBu (–60 dBu or –50 dBu, selected on menu)  
WIRELESS IN (D-SUB, 25 pins):  
Input level: –40 dBu  
Audio Output Connectors  
AUDIO OUT CH1/CH2 (XLR, 5 pins, male):  
Output level:  
For AJ-HDX900P: +4 dBu  
For AJ-HDX900E: 0 dBu  
(–3 dBu, 0 dBu or +4 dBu, selected on menu)  
PHONES:  
Stereo mini jacks a2  
Video Input Connector  
GENLOCK IN (BNC):  
1.0 VP-P, 75Ω  
(It can also be used as an input connector for the return  
video signals.)  
Video Output Connector  
VIDEO OUT (BNC):  
It can be switched among HD-SDI/SD-SDI/Composite.  
HD-SDI  
SD-SDI  
: 0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω  
: 0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω  
Composite : 1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω  
MON OUT (BNC):  
It can be switched between HD-SDI and HD-Y  
HD-SDI  
HD-Y  
: 0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω  
: 1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω (analog signal)  
Weight and dimensions when shown are approxlmately.  
Speclilcailons are subject to change without notice.  
133  
Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment  
(private households)  
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should  
not be mixed with general household waste.  
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points, where they will  
be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return your products to your  
local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.  
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on  
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. Please contact your local authority  
for further details of your nearest designated collection point.  
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.  
For business users in the European Union  
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.  
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union  
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.  
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.  
Panasonic Broadcast & Television Systems Company  
Unit Company of Panasonic Corporation of North America  
Executive Office:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7000  
EASTERN ZONE:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7196  
Southeast Region: (201) 348-7162  
WESTERN ZONE:  
3330 Cahuenga Blvd W., Los Angeles, CA 90068 (323) 436-3500  
Government Marketing Department:  
One Panasonic Way 2E-10, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7587  
Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION & ORDERING:  
9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (EST) (800) 334-4881/24 Hr. Fax (800) 334-4880  
Emergency after hour parts orders (800) 334-4881  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT:  
Emergency 24 Hour Service (800) 222-0741  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010  
Panasonic de Mexico S.A. de C.V.  
Av angel Urraza Num. 1209 Col. de Valle 03100 Mexico, D.F. (52) 1 951 2127  
Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc.  
San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Ave., Km. 9.5, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00630 (787) 750-4300  
Professional & Broadcast IT Systems Business Unit Europe  
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH  
Hagenauer Str. 43, 65203 Wiesbaden-Biebrich Deutschland Tel: 49-611-235-481  
© 2006 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.  
P E  

Polk Audio DXI108 User Manual
Orion Car Audio C63 User Manual
NewAir Thermoelectric Wine Cooler AW 180E User Manual
Metra Electronics 99 8100 User Manual
Metra Electronics 95 7866B User Manual
Lochinvar COPPER FIN CB 0495 User Manual
Kodak GE1900C User Manual
Kenwood Car Video System DDX7049BT User Manual
JVC KD ADV5580 User Manual
JVC HD EVERIO GZ HM340 User Manual